advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 306
-. i ! --. 7 1994 Owner’s Manual Pontiac Trans Sport Introduction Part I Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part 7 Part 8 Table of Contents ............. 3G Seats & RestraintSystems ........... 7e Features & Controls ............... 53 e Comfort Controls & Audio Systems . 119 Your Driving and the Road ......... Problemson the Road ............. 175 1 Service & Appearance Care ........ 205 y MaintenanceSchedule ............ 255 r CustomerAssistanceInformation .. 273 L Index ........................... 297 a Service Station Information .. Last Page HOWto Use this Manual Includes “Reporting Safety Defects” onpage 277. part9 ~~ Printed in USA 10260060 A Second Edition . . . Important Notes About this Manual Please keep this manual in your Pontiac, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. Note to Canadian Owners For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute thename “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual: Aux propriktaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ceguide en fraqais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd., 1500 Bonhill Rd., Mississauga, Ontario L5T lC7. Published by Pontiac Motor Division General Motors Corporation The *ord Pontiac, the Pontiac Emblem and the name Trans Sport are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation. The word Delco is a registered trademarkof General Motors Corporation. @ m . . 2 Copyright 1993 General Motors Corporation, Pontiac Motor Division. All rights reserved. How to Use this Manual Using Your 1994 Pontiac Owner’s Manual Part 3: Comfort Controls & Audio Systems This part tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your sound system. Part 8: Customer Assistance Information This part tells you how to contact Pontiac Many people read theirowner’s manual for assistance and how to get service from beginning to end when they first publications. It also gives you information receive their new vehicle. Thiswill help on “Reporting Safety Defects’’ on page you learn about the features and controls Part 4: Your Driving and the Road 277. for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll Here you’ll find helpful information and Part 9: Index find that pictures and words work tips about the road and how to drive under together to explain things quickly. Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost different conditions. every subject in this manual. You can use it There are nine parts with black-tabbed Part 5: Problems on the Road to quickly find something you want to read. pages in this manual. Each part begins This part tells you what to do if you have Service Station Information with a brief list of contents,so you can 3 problem while driving, such as a flat tire usually tell ata glance if that part contains This is a quick reference of service 3r engine overheating. the information you want. information. You can find it on the last Part 6: Services & Appearance Care page of this manual. You can bend the manual slightly to reveal Here the manual tells you how to keep the black tabs that help you finda part. your Pontiac running properly and looking good. Part 1: Seats & Restraint Systems Part 7: Maintenance Schedule This part tells you how to use yourseats and safety belts properly. It also explains This part tells you when to perform the “SIR” (Air Bag) System. vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. Part 2: Features & Controls This part explains how to start and operate your Pontiac. d... How to Use this Manual You will also find a circle with a slash Safety Warnings and Symbols ihrough it in this book. This safety symbol means: You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box with gray background and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. “Don’t,” “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.” In the gray caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this book you will find these notices: NOTICE: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin different colors or in different words. In this manual, we’ve used the familiar words that Pontiac has usedfor years. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use yellow for cautions, blue for notices, and the words CAUTION or NOTICE. ...4 These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: For example, these symbols are used on an original battery: These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: DOOR LOCK UNLOCK PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING FASTEN CAUSTIC 4 These symbols have to do with your lights: These symbols are on some of your controls: WINDSHIELD WIPER TURN SIGNALS e SEAT BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM RADIATOR COOLANT BELTS WINDOW DEFOGGER BURNS HIGH SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BATTERY ENGINE COOLANT TEMP =o = OR BEAM ,\I/, FOG LAMPS $0 c rl r;- VENTILATING FAN -F- Here are some other symbols you may see: FUSE -%- I-1 RADIO VOLUME a k , I 43 CONDITIONING AIR FUEL @ TRUNK RELEASE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 9% LIGHTER a m TEMP OIL ANTIBRAKE U)CK (i) SPEAKER b 5... Notes / ...6 Part I Seats & Restraint Systems . H e r e you’ll find information about the seats in p u r Pontiac and how to use your safety beltsproperly. You can also tearn about some things you should not do with safety belts . Seats and Seat Controls ............................................... 8 Removing and Replacing Rear Seats ............................... : .... 11 SafetyBelts ....................................................... 17 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ..................................... 21 DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System ................................ 25 30 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................................... Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ... 30 RearSeatPassengers ................................................ 30 Children .......................................................... 35 Smaller Children and Babies .......................................... 36 Built-In ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Child Restraints .................................................... 43 LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Safety Belt Extender ................................................ 51 Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash .................... 51 . 7 ... Seats & Restraint Systems Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats-how to adjust them, take them out, put them back in, and fold them up and down. Manual Front Seats Four- Way Manual Seat %dl up the lever on the front of theseat to ~nlockit. Slide the seat to where you vant it. Then release the lever and try to nove the seat with your body, to make are the seat is locked into place. The driver’s seat can be adjusted four ways. Use the lever on the front of the seat to adjust the seat forward or back(see “Manual Front Seats” earlier in this section). To raise the driver’s seat, pull up the lever on the side of the seat. To lower the seat, push the lever down. -..8 Six- Way PowerSeat Reclining Front Seatbacks (OPTION) To adjust the seatback, rotate this knob. To adjust the driver’s six-way power seat: Do not have a seatback reclined if your Front Control (A): Raise the front of the vehicle is moving. seat by holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the front of the seat. Center Control (B): Move the seat forward or back by holding the control to the front or back. Raise or lower the seat by holding the control up or down. Rear Control (C): Raise the rear of the seat by holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the rear of the seat. 9... Seats & Restraint Systems Reclining Front Seatbacks Head Restraints (CONK) Slide the head restraint up or downso that the top of the restraint is closestto the top of your ears. This position reduces the chanceof a neck injury in a crash. On some models, the head restraintstilt forward and rearward also. Bench Seat If you have a rear bench seat, the seatback can be folded down. Also, the bench seat can be removed or moved to a different floor location to provide extra storage space. 0 .IO Folding the Seatback Removing the Bench Seat Replacing the Bench Seat To fold down the seatback, lift the seatback latch release while foldingthe seatback forward. 1. Make sure the seatback is in the upright position, and that all safety belts are on the seat. To raise the seatback, lift the seatback 2. Then lift the seatback latch release latch release while raising the seatback while folding the seatback forward. until it locks upright. Push and pullon the 3. From behind the bench seat, pull up seatback to check that it is locked. the two rear levers, and lift the bench seat. Don’t put the bench seat inso it faces backward, because it won’t latch that way. If you want more storage room behind the seat, use the floor pins closer to the front of the vehicle. See “Adjusting Rear Seats” later in this section. 1. Place the front hooks of the bench seat latch onto the front floor pins. 4. Remove the bench seat from the vehicle. II ... Seats & Restraint Systems Replacing the Bench Seat (CONT.)’ 4. Lift the seatback latch release and raise the seatback until it locks upright. 2. Push the rear hooks into’the rear floor 5. Push and pull on the seatback to check pins, then push down onuhe two levers that it is locked. to lock the rear of the bench in place. 3. Try to raise the bench seat to check that it is locked down. Semovable Rear Bucket Seats (OPTION) ?here are three typesof rear seats: ‘RIGHT ONLY”, “CENTER or LEFT”, .nd “LEFT ONLY”. “RIGHT ONLY” and ‘LEFT ONLY” seats may be equipped vith the built-in child restraint option. The rear bucket seats can be removed to Irovide extra storage. Each seatthat has he built-in child restraint option fitsin mly one location in your vehicle, but ‘eats thatdon’t have the built-in child estraint can be moved to different floor ocations. The back of each seat has a liagram (similar to the one above) that ;bows where the seat must be located in /our vehicle. 0 . . I2 “RIGHT ONLY” seats that don’t have the built-in child restraint fit only in the right locations. “LEFT ONLY” seats thatdon’t have the built-in child restraint fitonly in the left locations. The “CENTER OR LEFT” seat fits in the center location and in either left location. “RIGHT ONLY” seats that havethe built-in child restraint option fit onIy in the rear set of floor pins in the right location of the second row. “LEFT ONLY” seats that have the built-in child restraint optionfit only in the rearset of of the floor pins in the left location second row. Entry to Third Row Bucket Seats The “RIGHT ONLY” seats have a lower To install third row seats, the second row lever to tilt the seat forward. To get into seats must be tilted forward or removed. third row seats, push the lever on the Don’t put the seats in the wrong locations. “RIGHT ONLY” seat nearest the sliding door and tilt the seat forward. Then pull the seat back and check that it locks into place. To get out of the third row seats, push down on the rear release bar under the seat ahead of you to tilt the seat forward. Seats & Restraint Systems Removing Rear Bucket Seats Removing the RIGHTONLY Seats: 1. Lift the upper lever to fold the seatback forward. 2. Push the lower lever back so the entire seat and seatback tilt forward. 3. Then, from behind the seat, support the top portion of the seat with one hand as you squeeze the front release bar toward the crossbar. The seat will release from the floor pins. temoving LEFT ONLY and CENTER IR LEFT Seats: I. Lift the upper lever to fold the seatback forward. I 2. Push down on the rear release bar. The 3. Then, from behind the seat, support entire seat will tilt forward. the top portion of the seat with one hand as you squeeze the front release bar toward the crossbar. The seat will release from the floor pins. Adjusting Rear Seats Each rear seat location has two sets of floor pins. Seats equipped with the built-in child restraint option must be secured in the rear set of floor pins. Seats that don’t have the built-in child restraint can be secured in either set of floor pins. Move the position of these seats up or back to provide a little more room behind or in front of a seat. IS... Seats & Restraint Systems I Replacing Rear Bucket Seats 1. With the entire seat tilted forward, place the front hooks of the seat latch onto the front floor pins. Follow the diagram on the back of the seats to replace the seats in their proper location. 2. Firmly press the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins. The seat should lock into position. The “LEFT ONLY” seats fit only in the left positions. The “RIGHT ONLY” seats fit only in the right positions. The “CENTER OR LEFT” seat fits in the center position and in either left position. 3. Lift the upper lever and pull up on the To install third row seats, if your vehicle is equipped with them, the second row seats must be tilted forward or removed. 5. Check to see that you have put the seats into the proper location, according to the label on each seat. If not, the seats may not latch properly, and your passengers may not have the proper safety belt. Don’t try to place the seats in backward, because they won’t latch that way. . . 16 seatback until it locks upright. 4. Push and pull on the seat to check that it is locked. Dump And Stow Feature Second and third row seats have been modified to allow them to foldfully upward and forward when the seatsare anchored in the rear-most position.This modification improves both luggage/cargo capacity and rear seat entry/exit. Safety Belts: They’re For Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint, or “air bag” system. This figure lights up as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) In many states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Hexe’s why: Thev work. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. 17... Seats & Restraint Systems Safety Belts: They’re For Everyone (CONI) A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. Why Safety Belts Work 2. When the bike hits the block, it stops. But the child keeps going! When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. 1. For example, if the bike is going 10 mph (16 km/h), so is the child. After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! 3. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels. ... 18 4. Put someone on it. 6. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ... 5. Get it up to speed. Then stop the 8. or the safety belts! "Y. I With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distanqe, and your strongest bones take the forFes. That's why safety belts make such good sense. 7. or the instrument panel ... vehicle. The rider doesn't stop. 19. Seats & Restraint Systems I‘ Q: Why don’t they just put in air bags so people won’t have to wear safety Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -and the Answers A: Air bags, or Supplemental Inflatable Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accidentif I’m wearing a safety belt? ,! :r ‘,.?.2 . *:y.:& ; ,$;@& belts? , .;< A: You could bme --.whet er you re- wearing a safety belt or not. But you can easily unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Restraint systems, are in some vehicles today and will be in more of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only -- so they work with safety belts, not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. c2: If I’m a good driver, andI never drive far from home, whyshould I wear safety belts? 4: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident -- even one that isn’t your fault-- you and your passengers can behurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such asbad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles :40 km) of home. And the greatest number D f serious injuries anddeathsoccurat speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. 1 1 How To Wear Safety Belts Properly f Adults This section is only for people of adult size. Safety Beli Reminder Light When the key is turned to “Run” or “Start,” a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind peopleto fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. Thesafety belt light will also come on and stay on until the driver’s belt is buckled. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your Pontiac, see “Children,” 1 Driver Position located later in this section. Follow those This section describes the driver’s rules for everyone’s protection. restraint system. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. 21 ... Seats & Restraint Systems I Lapshoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. If the belt stops beforeit reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the If the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt Extender” at the endof this section. Make sure the release buttonon the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. ...22 c r I, 5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. 7’he lap part of the belt should be worn 1(IW and snug on the hips, just touching tlle thighs. In a crash, this applies force to tlle strong pelvic bones. And you’d be le:ss likely to slide under the lap belt. If Y ou slid under it, the belt would apply fcxce at your abdomen. This could cause stxious or even fatal injuries. The SInoulder belt should go over the shoulder a1nd across the chest. These parts of the blody are best able totake belt restraining fcxces. 2: What’s wrong with this? \: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden st:op or a crash. 23. . Seats & Restraint Systems Lap-Shoulder Belt(CONT.) Q: What’s wrong with this? 3: What’s wrong withthis? Q: What’s wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest. k The shoulder beltis worn under the A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. ...24 arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System (Air Bag) This section explains the driver’s Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) system, commonly referred to as an air bag. Here are the most important things to know: I’ Q: What’s wrong withthis? I A: The belt is twisted across the body. 3efore you close the door, be sure the belt 3 out of the way. If you slam the door on t, you can damage both the belt and your ,chicle. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. 25... Seats & Restraint Systems Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System (AirBag) (CONT.) AIR BAG Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows“AIR BAG’ on it. The system checks for electrical malfunctions, and the light tells you if there is a problem. ...26 You will see this light flashfor a few seconds when you turn your ignitionto “Run” or “Start.” Then the light shouldgo out, which meansthe system is ready. Remember, if the air bag readinesslight doesn’t come on when you start your vehicle, or stays on, orcomes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. H0.w The Air Bag System Works Where is the air bag? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. Seats & Restraint Systems How The Air Bag System Works (CONT.) What makes an air bag inflate? In a frontal impact of sufficient severity,the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is suddenly stopping as a result of a crash. The sensing system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen gas, which inflates the cloth bag. The inflator, cloth bag, and related hardware are all part ofthe air bag inflator module packed inside the steering wheel. How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wrhee:l. The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not provide protection in many types of collisions, including rollovers and rear and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belt protection in moderate to severe frontal and near-frontal collisions. 0 The air bagis designed to inflate only once. After it inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, theair bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include the air bag module and possibly other parts. The service manual has information about the need to replace other parts. 0 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module, which records information about the airbag system if the air bag deploys duringa crash. The module records information about the readiness of the system, which sensors activated the deployment, and whether the driver’s safety belt wasin use. 0 Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service. What will you see afteran air bag inflation? After the air bag has inflated, it will then quickly deflate. This occurs so quickly that some people may not even realize that the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module in the steering wheel hub may be hot for a short time, but the portion of the bag that comes into contact with you will not be hot to the touch. There will be small amounts of smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bag. The air bag will not impede the driver’s vision or ability to steer the vehicle, nor will it hinder the occupants from exiting the vehicle. 1 I NOTICE: If you damage the cover for the driver’s air bag, it may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag on the steering wheel. Do not open or break the air bag II cover. Is the smoke from an air bag inflation harmful? The particles emitted duringair bag inflation are not harmfulto most people. Some people with respiratory ailments may experience difficulty breathing if they stay in the vehicle with the windows closed after air bag inflation. So, if your air bag inflates, you and any passengers should exit the vehicle if and when it is safe to do so. If you or your passengers can’t get out of the vehicle, try to get fresh air by opening a window, turningor the fan, or opening a door. I Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac The air bag affects how your Pontiac should be serviced. There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your Pontiac dealer and the 1994 Pontiac Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. r Seats & Restraint Systems I Rear Seat Passengers X’s very important for rear seat Jassengers to buckle up! Accident itatistics show that unbelted people in the -ear seatare hurt more often in crashes :han those whoare wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted :an be thrown outof the vehicle in a :rash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lapshoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. 30 Right Front Passenger Position The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safetl belt. See “Driver Position,” earlier in this part. C Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it. Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. If the belt is not longenough, see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the endof this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you Zver had to. 31 ... Seats & Restraint Systems The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden ;top ora crash. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions (CONI) 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. a To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. Center Passenger Position (Bench Seat) If your vehicle has a rear bench seat, someone can sit in the center position. Lap Belt When you sit in the center position of the bench seat, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. Seats & Restraint Systems Lap Belt (CONK) To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 00.34 Center Passenger Position (Bucket Seat) 1. Pick up the latch plateand, in a single motion, pull the beltacross you. Don’t let it get twisted. f your vehicle has bucket seats, someone :an sit in the center bucket seat. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, letit go back all the way and startagain. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 1 lap Belt Nhen you sit in the center position buck€ eat, you have a lap safety belt which has 1 retractor. 3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it. 4. Position and release it the same way as the lap partof a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’tlong enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Makesure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. The center position bucket seat is a “Center or Left” type seat.Because it is the only bucket seat with a lap belt, and has a buckle on only one side, there are certain places a “Center or Left”type bucket seat should, and should not, be used. See “Seats” in the Index. If the “Center or Left” bucketseat is used on the left side of the vehicle,the person sitting there should use the lap-shoulder belt. It works the same way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position”in the Index. Children Everyone in a vehicleneeds protechon! That includes infants and all childta smaller than adult size. In fact, the,;hawin every state in the United States and,in every Canadian province says chilqken up to some agemust be restrained whifein a vehicle. 35.0. Seats & Restraint Systems Smaller Children and Babies ...36 D. Shoulder Harness Clip E. Removable Pad F. Seat Belt Latch Plates G. Buckle H. Seat Belt Buckle Release Button (Red) I. Shoulder Harness Release Strap (Black) Built-Zn Child Restrain, J. Shoulder Harness Adjustment Strap (Grey1 (OPTION) K. Child Restraint Cushion If you have a rear seat with the optional built-in child restraint, refer to thispictun to become familiar with the partsof each child seat and 5-point harness listed below: A. Child Head Restraint B. Head Restraint Release Strap C. Shoulder Harness Straps This child restraint system conforms to all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. This child restraint is designed for use only by children who weigh between 20 and 40 pounds (9 and 18 kg) and whose height is 40 inches ( 102 cm) or less and who are capable of sitting upright alone. In addition, the child must be one year old or more and at least 28 inches (71 cm) in height. It is important to use an approved, rear-facing infant restraint for a full year to allow the neck and spine to develop enough to support the weight of the child’s head in the event of a collision. Seats & Restraint Systems WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURER’S [NSTRUCTIONS ON THE USEOF I’HIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE VEHICLE’S [NTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUST THE BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD. I Built-In Child Restraini (COPIT.) :o make sure that the child is tall enough! ompare thechild’s standing height to the op surface of the bucket seat, which is .bout 29 inches (74 cm) from thefloor. ..- 3 8 The booster seat canbe used by children wer 40 pounds (18 kg) or whose .boulders are above theshoulder belt mchorages of the 5-point child restraint larness. The vehiclelap-shoulder belt is lsed instead of the 5-point harness ,ystem. If a child’s shoulders are higher han the shoulder belt anchorages while lsing the 5-point harness, the spine could )e injured in a collision. Just like the other restraint system inyou vehicle, your built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked and may need to have parts replaced after a crash. See ”Checking Your Restraint Systems’’ and “Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After aCrash” in the Index. II I' I To Use the Built-in Child Restraint 1. Pull the child head restraint release strap and raise the head restraintuntil you hear the latch click. I !. Lower the child restraint cushion. 3. Before placing.the child in the child restraint, add slack to the shoulder hamess. Pull the black shoulder harness release strap firmly. At the same time pull both shoulder harness straps through the slots in the sedback as shown. ..*+ - ,' '.)s# $'...i. . -. 1 39.m. Seats & Restraint Systems To Use the Built-in Child 7estraint (CONT.) E. Separate the halves of the shoulder harness clip. i. Place the child in the child restraint and put a shoulder harness strap over each shoulder. Insert both seat belt latch plates into the buckle and pull ul on them to make sure they are firmly latched. Be sure that the seat buckle is free of foreign objects that may prevent you from properly latching the latch plates If an object is in the opening, see your Pontiac dealer for service before using the child restraint. ...40 6 Fasten the two halves of the shoulder harness clip together and put it two to three inches (5-8 cm) below the child’s chin.The purpose of the clip is to keep the shoulder harness straps positioned correctly on the shoulders. If you expect the child will sleep while riding, a U-shaped pillow that supports the child’s chin may be helpful in providing additional comfort. Such devices may be found in the child restraint section of major toy stores or other stores where children’s accessories are sold. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap (grey) firmly until the shoulder harness straps are snug againstthe child’s shoulders. 1. To release the child from theharness, separate the halvesof the shoulder harness clip. Then push the red releast button in the buckle. Move the shoulder harness straps to the side an( remove the child. iTo Store the Built-lnChild tqestraint Make sure that the crotch strap is held flush to the child restraint cushion with the fastener strip. Also be sure the shoulder harness adjustment strap (grey) is folded up in the seat. This will allow the cushion to fold completely into the seatback. Raise the cushion. 41 ... Seats & Restraint Systems To Store the Built-ln Child To Use as a Booster Seat Sestraint (CQNT.);, 1. Pull the head restraint release strap !. Unlatch the child head restraint by pulling the release.strap. Lower the head restraint and press it firmly into the seatback until you hear the latch click. .7 ...42 and raise the head restraint until you hear the latch click. !. Lower the child restraint cushion. Child Restraints Be sure to follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or ina booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you howto do that. 3. Store the 5-point child restraint harness behind the removable pad. The pad is held in place by fastener strips. .5 Place the child on the cushion and fasten the vehicle lap-shoulder belt around the child. . To release the child from the vehicle lap-shoulder belt, push the red button on the buckle. 43... Seats & Restraint Systems Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat unless the child is an infant and you’re the only adult in the vehicle. In that case, you might want to secure the restraint in the front seat where you cankeep an eye on the baby. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure’ the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. Top Strap If your child restraint has a top strap, I t should be anchored. If your vehicle has third row seats, anchor brackets for the second row outside positions are located just above the place where the thirdrow lap-shoulder belts meet the floor. There’sa vinyl sleeve there; to get to the bracket, push thisvinyl sleeve aside slightly. Anchor the top strap to the bracket. If your vehicle does not have third row seats and belts, orif you need to have an anchor bracket installed for any additional passenger seat position, you canask your Pontiac dealer to put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor bracket yourself, your dealer can tellyou how to do it. Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself. ma.44 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap n and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. c If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. Securing a Chi-ldRestrain4 n an Outside Position bu’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See le earlier section about the top strap if le child restraint has one. . Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions forthe child restraint. . Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 4. B,ucklethe belt. Make sure the xelease button is positioned so you woild be able to unbuckle the safety beli:’. quickly if you ever had to. ’ Seats & Restraint Systems Securing a Child Restraint6. in an Outside Position (CON7J 5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. ...46 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Seat Position (Bench Seat) To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let When you secure a child restraint in a it go back all the way. The safety belt will center seating position, you’ll be using the lap belt. move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. If the child restraint hasa top strap, see “Top Strap” earlier in this section. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions tobe sure it is secure. If the child restraint isn’t secure, turn the latch plate overand buckle it again. Then see if it is secure. If it isn’t, secure therestraint in a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint makdr for their advice about how to attach the child restraint properly. 1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latchplate and pulling it along the belt. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for thechi1.drestraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. r To remove the child restraint, just 5. Buckle the belt. ‘Makesure the release unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready towork for an adult or l&ger button is positioned so you would be child passenger. able tounbuckle the safetybelt quickly if you ever had to. 6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. 4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 470.0 Seats & Restraint Systems Securing a Child Restraint 3. in the Center Seat Positior: 4. (Bucket Seat) You’ll be using the lap belt. See the earlier section about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. ...48 Pull the lap belt all the way out without stopping. While holding it out, run the belt through or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 6. To tighten the belt, feed it back into the retractor whileyou push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Larger Children 3hildren who have outgrown child *estraintsshould wear the vehicle’s safety >elk f you have the choice, a child shouldsit lext to a window so the child can wear a ap-shoulder belt and get the additional .estraint a shoulder belt can provide. 4ccident statistics show that children are iafer if they are restrained in the rear seat. 3ut they need to use the safety belts xoperly. D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash. Seats & Restraint Systems Q:What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt, but the child isso small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck? A: Move the child toward the centerof Larger Children(CONT.) 0 Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are. ...50 the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide..If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s faceor neck, you might want to place the child in a sea-t that has a lap belt,if your vehicle has one. Seats & Restraint Systems [f your vehicle has the built-in child Yestraint, torn or frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces just like torn 3r frayed safety belts can. They may not protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn or frayed, get a new harness right away. Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After a Crash (CONT.) Q: What’s wrong with this? A: The belt is torn. Torn or frayed belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is tom or frayed, get a new one right away. ... 52 Before replacing any safety belt, see your dealer for the correct part number. You’ll need the model year and model number for your vehicle. The model year is on your title and registration. And you can find the model number on the Certification/Tire label of your vehicle. See “Certification/Tire Label” in the Index. The model number on the replacement belt must be listed on the safety belt you want to replace. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out to see the label. H e r e you can learn about the many standard and optional features on Part your Pontiac. and information on starting. shiftingand braking. Atso explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly .. Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 and what todo if you have a problem. Front Doors ....................................................... 55 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Remote Keyless Entry ............................................ . . 58 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) ......................... . . 72 Shifting the Transaxle ................................................. 73 ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 . . 78 Shifting into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "'''''.I . . 81 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . 81 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a1 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator ................................. 83 CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 87 Headlights ........................................................ 90 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Windshield Washer ................................................. Rear Window Wiper and Washer ....................................... 92 92 Interior Lights ..................................................... Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Glove Box and Storage Compartments .................................. 98 Luggagecarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 105 Instrumentpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators .................................. 110 53 2 Features & Controls c ... Features & Controls [hen a new Trans Sport is delivered,the Zaler removes the plugs from the keys, Id gives them to the first owner. ach plug has a code on it that tells your zaler or a qualified locksmithhow to lake extra keys. Keep the plugs ina safe lace. If you lose your keys, you’llbe Ae to have new ones made easily using lese plugs. w Keys The ignition keys are for the ignition only. Your Pontiac has a number ofnew features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicleif you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys. The door keys are for the doors and all other locks. ..e54 NOTICE: Door Locks Front Doors There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the Outside: '?< Use your door key or remote keyl& entry transmitter, if your vehicle his this option. I . Features & Controls ;witch or the remote transmitter. This ’eature is designed to help keep you from ocking your keysin your vehicle. [f the sliding door is open when you press :he power door lock switch, it will lock mtomatically within five seconds after you close it. w Door Locks (CONT.) w Power Door Locks [f you have the optional Remote Keyless Entry System, this featurewill be replaced by a different lock delay system. See “Remote Keyless Entry” later in this section. With power locks, when the doors are locked, the inside as well as the outside From the outside of either front door, the door latch release cannot open the doors. To lock the door, slide the locking lever door key unlocks all doors and the rearward. This safety feature preventsa door from liftgate. From the inside, press the front of being accidentally opened from the inside To unlock the door, slide the locking lever the power door lock switch on either front by moving the handle. forward. door. To override this safety feature, slide the You can lock all doors and the liftgate locking lever to the unlock position on the from inside by pressing the rear of the door you want to open. power lock switch on either front door. When the liftgate has been unlocked with If you have the optional Remote Keyless the power door locks, you won’t need the Entry System, your vehicle has a special key to open it. Simplyturn the lock security feature. If the driver’s door is clockwise until the latch releases. This is open and your key is in the ignition in the also true if you use the optional remote off position, you won’t be able to set the keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote door locks with the power door lock Keyless Entry’’ later in this section. From the Inside: ...56 (OPTION) To lock the liftgate, use the powerdoor lock switch, the optional remote keyless entry transmitter, or lock it manually by turning the lock counterclockwise. Automatic Door Locks Overriding Lock Delay 0 To program the automatic door locks system to unlock only the driver’s door when the shift lever is returned to “I?” (Park), press the unlock symbol on your remote transmitter once. The driver’s door will unlock, indicating that this mode has been successfully programmed. 0 To program the automatic door locks system to unlock all doors when the shift lever is returned to “P” (Park), press the unlock symbol on your remote transmitter once (the driver’s door will unlock), then press the unlock symbol again. All doors will unlock, indicating that this mode has been successfully programmed. To override the lock delay feature, press the front of the power door locks switch (the unlock position) while the shift lever is in “P” (Park). If you have the Remote Keyless Entry System, there are three additional ways With this feature you can unlock allof the you can disable the lock delay feature: doors from the outsideby holding the key Press the unlock symbol on your in the unlock position for one second. To remote transmitter, unlock only the driver’s or passenger’s door, turn the keyto the unlock position 0 Return the shift lever to “P” (Park), or and release. 0 Turntheignitionoff. From the inside, when the ignition is on Customizing Your Automatic Door and the driver’s dooris closed, all doors Locks Feature will lock each time you move the shift lever out of “P” (Park), or manually lock 1he.doors using the power lock switches With the Remote Keyless Entry System you can customize your automatic door they will lock when closed. locks feature to suit your individual If the sliding dooris open when you move needs. (See “Remote Keyless Entry” later .in this section.) the shift lever out of“P” (Park), a lock delay feature allows the sliding door to With the doors closed and the ignition on, lock five seconds after it is closed. press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch in the lock position for ten With the automatic door locks feature, seconds. The doors will lock, then unlock, you can still lock or unlock the doors at indicating that you have ten seconds in any time, either manually orwith the which to program one of four custom power door lock switches. modes. (OPTION) To program the automatic door locks system to leave all doors locked when the shift lever is returned to “P” (Park), press the lock symbol on your remote transmitter once. All doors will lock, indicating that this mode has been successfully programmed. s/... Features & Controls Automatic Door Locks nterference received, including nterference that may cause undesired )peration. (CONT.) 0 To disengage the automatic door locks system, press the lock symbol on your remote transmitter once (all doors will lock). Then press the lock symbol again. All doors will lock again, indicating that this mode has been successfully programmed. should interference to this system occur, .ry this: You can reprogram the automatic door locks system at any time. If you do not w Remote Keyless Entry program the automatic door locks system, (OPTION) all doors will remain locked when the shift lever is returned to “P” (Park). If your Pontiac has this option, you can lock and unlock your doors and liftgate If you have more than one remote from up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the transmitter for your vehicle, your key chain transmitter supplied with your automatic door locks system will operate vehicle. as programmed with any of them. There is no need to program each one Your Remote Keyless Entry System individually. operates on a radio frequency subject to w Leaving Your Vehicle Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules. If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This devicl may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any ...58 D Be sure to use the transmitterwith the ignition switch “OFF’ to eliminate interference from other electronic systems in the vehicle. D Check to determineif battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions on battery replacement. Check the distance.You may be too far from your vehicle. This product has a maximum range. 0 Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. 0 See your Pontiac dealer ora qualified technician for service. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Operation with the interior lights on, press a The driver’s door will unlock andthe interior lights will go on when is pressed (see “Illuminated Entry System” later in this section). If pressed again within five seconds, all doors and the liftgate will unlock. All doors and the liftgate will lock when 6 is pressed. If the driver’s door is open and your key is in the ignition in theO f position, you won’t be able to set the door locks with the power door lock switch or theremote transmitter. This security feature is designed to help keepyou from locking your keys in your vehicle. Lock Delay This lock delay feature canbe operated using either the remote key chain transmitter or the power door lock switch (see “Power Door Locks” earlierin this section). For the lock delay featureto work, the ignition and the interior lights controlto the left of the instrument panel cluster must be off. If you wish to lock thedoors 6 or the rear of either power door lock switch twice. If any door is open when you press 6 or the rear ofeither power door lock switch, a chime will sound three times. This indicates that all doors and the liftgate will lock about five seconds after the last door has been closed. To override the lock delay feature, press the lock symbol orthe rear of either power door lock switch again, and the Joors and liftgate will lock immediately. [f the sliding door is open, it will lock mtomatically within five seconds after it .s closed, and the doors and liftgate will -ock again. To cancel the lock delay feature, press the unlock symbol or the front of either power door lock switch. :emote Operation of Power Sliding boor ’ you have the optional power sliding oor (see “Power Sliding Door” later in lis section), your remote transmitter will ave a third button labeled Press . to open or close the sliding door.’ F the sliding door is locked, first press 3 twice to unlock all doors, then press a to open the sliding door. ‘ou can operate the power sliding door rith the remote transmitter only when the ower sliding door enable switch on the verhead console is in the “ON” position. 59.. . Features & Controls Ib Replace Batteriesin the Kemote Keyless Entry: Matching Transmitterfs) To Your Vehicle Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring the remaining transmitter with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, the remaining transmitter must also be matched‘ Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. You can match a transmitter to as many different vehicles as you own, provided they are equipped with exactly the same model system. (General Motors offers several different models of these systems on their vehicles.) Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it. See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle. ...60 I. Remove the screw from the back cover. 2. Lift the front cover off, bottom half first. 3. Remove and replace the two3-volt batteries (DL 2016). 4. Reassemble the transmitter. 1Battery Replacement 1Jnder normal use, the batteries in your ELey chain transmitter should last about t wo years. fou can tell thebatteries are weak if the t ransmitter won’t work at the normal r;ange in any location. If you have to get C.lose to your vehicle before the tlransmitter works, it’s probably time to C:hange the batteries. 7 5. Check the transmitter operation. If the back of your transmitter hasa slot instead of a screw, follow these battery replacement instructions: To Replace Batteriesin the Remote Keyless Entry: 1. Insert a coin into the slot in the back of the transmitter, andturn counterclockwise to open the cover. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Remove and replace the two 3-volt batteries (DL 20 16). 4. Reassemble the transmitter. 5. Check the transmitter operation. Illuminated Entry System (OPTION) Theft Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your Pontiac has a This option comes with the optional number of theft deterrent features, we Remote Keyless Entry System. know that nothing we put on it can make When you open the driver’s door, by itself it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. or in combination with any passenger door or the liftgate, the interior lights will come on and then gradually dim to off 10 Key in the Ignition seconds after the last door is closed. (If If you walk away from your vehicle with the driver’s door has not been opened, the the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy interior lights will immediately dim to riders or professional thieves -- so don’t off.) do it. a When you press on your remote transmitter, the lights inside your vehicle will go on, then gradually dim to off after 40 seconds, unless a door or the liftgate is opened. When you park your Pontiac and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition and When you turn on the ignition, the transaxle. And remember to lock the interior lights will immediately dim to off. doors. 61 ... Features & Controls Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle? 0 Sliding Door To open the sliding door from outside the vehicle, pull the front of the latch release Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box or locking storage out and then toward the rear. If you slide the door all the way back, it will latch in bin. the open position. Lock the storage bin. 0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s. 0 Then take the door key with you. ...62 To move the door forward, you must first pull the inside or outside latch release out and then forward or the door will remain latched in the open position. c Sliding Door Lock Power Sliding Door From inside the vehicle, lock the sliding door by moving the manual locking lever down. Unlock by moving the lever up. (OPTION) If you have the optional power door locks, the sliding door lock has a delay feature. See “Power Door Locks”in the Index. With this option, you can open and close the sliding door with switches inside your vehicle. If you have the optional Remote Keyless Entry System, you can also operate the sliding door with your remote transmitter. See “Remote Keyless Entry” in the Index. To operate the power sliding door, the power sliding door enable switch must be in the “ON” position. This switch is located overhead on the edge of the front reading lights console. To disable the power sliding door feature, slidethe switch to “OFF”. To open or close the sliding door, press and release one of two “PWR DOOR’’ (Power Door) switches. There is one located overhead between the front reading lights, and one mounted on the wall, just in front of the sliding door. 63 ... Features & Controls Power Sliding Door (CONE) The sliding door must be unlockedfor the power sliding door to operate. The key does not have to be in the ignition. To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door, disable the power sliding door by placing the power sliding door enable switch in the “OFF” position. The power sliding door will only open if the transaxle is in “P” (Park). The transaxle does not have to be in “ P ’ (Park) to close the door. If the enable switch is “ON” and the power sliding door is open or in the process of closing when you shift out of “P” (Park), a buzzer will sound and the “SLIDING DOOR” light on your instrument panel will flash (see “Sliding Door Ajar Warning Light” in the Index). This is a warning that the sliding door is not completely closed. - ~~ I f anything obstructs the sliding door V vhile it is closing, the door will a utomatically reverse to the open I:losition, provided it meets sufficient r esistance. Resistance must be as strong a.s the force of the closing door,or S tronger. The force of the closing door i:ncreases significantly as the door a,pproaches the latch position. f ...64 Objects caught in the path of the sliding door may be damaged. Make sure the door path is clear before closingthe door. On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding door, a low voltage battery may cause the system to become inoperative. This is a built in feature to prevent damage to the power sliding door motor. To manually .openthe power slidingdoor when the sliding door enable switchis in the “ON” position, pull the inside or outside latch release and letgo; the door will open fully. When the battery has been charged, follow these steps: To manually open the power slidingdoor when the enable switch isin the “OFF” position, pull the inside or outside latch release and slide the door all the way back. 1. Make sure the door is in the closed position. 2. Turn the ignition off. To manually close the power sliding door when the sliding door enable door switch is in the “ON” position, pull the inside or outside latch release or the edge of the door. Move the door about four inches toward the closed position and release. The door will close completely and latch for you. To manually close the power sliding door when the enable switch is in the “OFF” position, pull the inside or outside latch release and slide the door all the way forward to the latch position. 3. Remove the fuse marked “TAIL” from the fuse panel. 4. Wait 30 seconds. 5. Reinstall the fuse. 6. Cycle the door open and closed with either the wall mounted or overhead console switch. Wait three seconds before opening and closing the door again. If this does not restore power sliding door operation, see your dealer for service. Features & Controls Siding Door Child Security Lock Your Pontiac may be equipped with a sliding door child security lock that helps prevent young children or other passengers from opening the sliding door from the inside. If you have the optional power sliding door, you can override the security lock by pressing either “PWR DOOR’ (Power Door) switch when the power sliding door To Use the Security Lock: enable switch is in the “ON” position. See 1. Move the security lock lever all the “Power Sliding Door” earlier in the way up. section. The security lock lever is located on the inside of the sliding door, near the rear edge of the door. To access the lever, open the sliding door. Use the security lock label on the rear edge of the door as a guide. Reach your hand around the inside rear corner of the sliding door to access the lever. 2. Close the door. With Optional Power Sliding Door 1. Slide the power sliding door enable switch on the overhead console to the “OFF” position. The sliding door cannot be opened using the inside handle when the security lock feature is in use. ’ You Want to Open the Sliding Door Vhen the Security Lock is On: . Unlock the sliding door from the inside. m CHILD ECURITY 0 m LOCK 0 ~ ~ 2. Then open the door from the outside. To Cancel the Sliding Door Lock: With Optional Power Sliding Door 1. Unlock the sliding door from the inside and open the door. 1. Slide the power sliding door enable switch to the “ON” position. 2. Press either “PWR DOOR” (Power Door) switch. You should let adults and older children know how the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock. If you don’t, adults or older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open the sliding door from the inside when the security lock feature is in use. 2. Move the security lock lever all the way down. The sliding door lock will now work normally. Liftgate Lock To unlock, insert the door key and turn the lock clockwise. The liftgate will automatically lock when you close it. If you have the optional power door locks or the Remote Keyless Entry System, the liftgate will lock and unlock differently. See “Power Door Locks’’ or “Remote Keyless Entry” in the Index. Features & Controls [ Raising the Lij’tgate Open the liftgate using the handle recessed above the license plate. Then, step back and the liftgate will rise by itself. Lights in the liftgate will come on, illuminating the rear cargo area (see “Interior Lights” in the Index). ...68 NOTICE: Be sure there are no overhead obstructions, such as a garage door, before you open the liftgate. You could slam the liftgate into something and break the glass. ~~ To close the liftgate, pull down on the strap, then firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate open, even slight11 See “Exhaust” in the Index. A light on your instrument panel will warn you if tf liftgate is not completely closed (see “Liftgate Ajar Warning Light” in the Index). New Vehicle “Break-In” Off: Unlocks the steering wheel, ignition, and transaxle, but does not send electrical power to any accessories. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed or towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition is off and the keyis in the ignition. NOTICE: Your modern Pontiac doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.’’But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or slow -- for the first 500 miles (804 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this “breaking-in” guideline every time you get new brake linings. Ignition Switch Nith the ignition key in the ignition witch, you can turn the switch to five jositions: Run: An “on” position to which the switch returns after you start your engine and release the switch. The switch stays in the Run position when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use Run to operate your electrical power accessories, and to display some instrument panel warning lights. kcessory: An “on” position in which rou can operate your electrical power Iccessories. Press in the ignition switch a5 Start: Starts the engine. When the e.ngine starts, release the key. The ignition switch rou turn the top of it toward you. will return to Run for normal driving. Jock: The only position in which you car emove the key. This locks your steering vheel, ignition and transaxle. 69. .. Features 8t Controls Ignition Switch (CONK) Note that even if the engine is not running, the positions Accessory and Run are “on” positions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio. NOTICE: If your key seems stuck in “Lock” and you can’t turn it, be sure it is all the way in. If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. .../u Starting Your Engine Engines start differently. The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number (VIh shows the code letter or number for your engine. You will find the VINat the top left of your instrument panel. (See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.) Follow the proper steps to start the engine. Move your shift lever to “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral). Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use “N” (Neutral) only. NOTICE: Don’t try to shift to “P” (Park) if your Pontiac is moving. If you do, you could damage the transaxle. Shift to “P” (Park) only when your vehicle is stopped. 3 start your 3.1 Liter engine: . Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to “Start.” When the engine starts, let goof the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: Holding your key in “Start” for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in “Start.” If it doesn’t start in three seconds (or starts but then stops), push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down for 12 more seconds, or until it starts. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try this: Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down. Then push your accelerator pedalall the way to the floor. Hold it there. Then hold the key in “Start.” This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Whenthe engine starts, let goof the key and the accelerator pedal.If the engine still doesn’t start, wait another 15 seconds and do Step 3 again. NOTICE: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the fuel injection system operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part ofthis manual that tells how to doit without damaging your vehicle.See “Towing Your Pontiac” in the Index. To start your 3.8 Liter engine: 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition keyto “Start.” When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: Holding your key in “Start” for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in “Start” for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure. 2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in “Start” for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery. /I ... Features & Controls w Driving Through Deep w Starting Your Engine Standing Water (CONT) NOTICE: NOTICE: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the fuel injection system operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing Your Pontiac” in the Index. If you drive tooquickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. ...72 Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) (OPTION) In very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. To use the coolant heater: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt outlet. NOTICE: After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged. e How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the weather, the kind of oil you have, Shifting theAutomatic and some other things.Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you Transaxle contact a Pontiac dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer There are several different positions for can give you the best advice for that your shift lever. In this manual, these are particular area. referred to by the commonly used symbols in the right column below: Park P Reverse R Neutral N Overdrive @ Drive D Second 2 First 1 Features & Controls Park Reverse P (Park): This locks your front wheels. R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily. I Index. if)you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index. NOTICE: Shifting to “R” (Reverse) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle. Shift is to “R” onlyafteryourvehicle stopped. I I To rock your vehicle back and forth to. get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle. see “If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. ... 74 I Neutral Forward Gears d (Neutral): In this position, yourengine loesn’t connect with the wheels. To @ (Automatic Overdrive): If your estart when you’re already moving, use ‘N” (Neutral) only. Also, use“N” when ’our vehicle is being towed. NOTICE: Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of “ P ’ (Park) or “N” (Neutral) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty. automatic transaxle has automatic overdrive, this position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re: 0 Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. 0 Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. You’ll shift down tothe next gear and have more power. 75 ... Features & Controls (Second Gear): This position gives you lore power but lower fuel economy. You Ln use “2”on hills. It can help control mr speed as you go down steep lountain roads, but then you wouldalso ant to use your brakes off and on. Forward Gears(CONT.) NOTICE: This Notice applies only if you have the 3.8L V6 engine and the automatic Overdrive transaxle. If your vehicle is so equipped, and if it se’ernsto start up rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens, have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then, you can use “2” (Second Gear) when you are drivin less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and D (Overdrive) for higher speeds. B NOTICE: D (Third Gear): If your automatic transaxle does not have Overdrive, this position is for normal driving, at all speeds, in most street and highway situations. If your automatic transaxle has Overdrivc “D’ is like @, but you never go into Overdrive. Here are some times you might choose “D” instead of @: When driving on hilly, winding roads When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears When going down a steep hill ... 76 Don’t drive in “2” (Second Gear) for more than 5 miles (8 km), or at speeds over 55 mph (88 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. Use “D” (@ or “D” if your vehicle has Overdrive) as much as possible. Don’t shift into “2” unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine. o Release the Parking Brake: 1 (First Gear): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than “2”. You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector leveris put in “I”, the transaxle won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. old the regular brake pedal down with 3ur right foot while you push down on le parking brake pedal with your left foot. To release the tension onthe parking -ake cable,you will need to apply about le same amount of pressure to the parking -ake pedal as you did when you set the Irking brake.) When you remove your pot from the parking brake pedal, it will 3p up to the release position. NOTICE: If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage yourtransaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehiclethere with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill. Parking Brake To Set the Parking Brake: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. - NOTICE: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle. ‘You are Towing a Trailer and are xking on Any Hill: See “Towing a railer” in the Index. That section shows hat to do first to keep the trailer from loving. 77 C Features & Controls Shifting Into 66P 99 (Park) 2. Move the shift lever into “P” (Park) position like this: 0 Pull the lever toward you. Move the lever up as far as it will go. 3. Move the ignition key to Lock. 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can walk. awayfrom your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicleis in “P”(Park). 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set theparking brake. eo.78 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in “P” (Park) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into the “P’ (Park) position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from “P’ (Park) without first pulling it toward you.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into “P’(Park). Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle into “P” (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of “P” (Park). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into “P” (Park) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the Index. r When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of “P” (Park) BEFORE you release the parking brake. If “torque lock” does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push .yours a Little uphill to take some of the pressure from the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of “P’ (Park). 79... Features & Controls Engine Exhaust I Parking Over Things That Burn Running Your Engine While You’re Parked It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. ...80 r I Tilt Wheel (OPTION) A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the Index. If you are pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Horn You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols on your steering wheel. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Manual Windows Use the manual crank to open and close the front windows. 81 ... Features & Controls Side Window Latches Power Windows (OPTION) Turn Signal/ Multifunction Lever With power windows, switches on the driver’s door armrest control thefi-ont The lever on the left side of the steering windows when the ignition is on. The left column includes your: To Open: Pull the latch forward to release switch controls the driver’s window.The it, then swing the window outward and right switch controls the passenger’s window. 0 Turn Signal and Lane Change press the center of the latch to secure the Indicator The driver’s power window switch has window in the open position. two down positions. Hold the rear of the 0 HeadlightHigh-Low Beam To Close: Pull the center of the latch switch in the first position to lower the forward and then close the latch. 0 CruiseControl (Option) window normally. The rear of the sidewindows swings open. To activate the auto down feature, fully press the rear of the switch, then release. The window will lower completely. To stop the window from lowering all the way, press the front of the switch. ...a2 To raise the window, press and hold the front of the switch. The High-Low Beam feature is discussed under “Headlights”. See “Headlights”in the Index. I If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help 11. ‘ Turn Signal andLane Change Indicator A green arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The turn signal has two upward (for Right) and twodownward (for Left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the green arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it. To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. avoid an accident. If the green arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse (see“Fuses & Circuit Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs. If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lights, a different turn signal flasher is used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal lights regularly to make sure they are working. Features & Controls When you apply your brakes, the Cruise Clontrol shuts off. To Set Cruise Control I. Move the Cruise Control switch to “ON’. Cruise Control (OPTION) With Cruise Control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise Control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 kmh). ...84 2. Get up to the speed you want. the case, you will not be able to resume your set speed by moving the cruise control switch to “RESUME/ACCEL”. Use the “SET” button to reset cruise (see “To Set Cruise Control” earlier in this section). 3. Push in the set button at the end of the lever and release it. 4. Take your fo-otoff the accelerator pedal. To Resume a Set Speed Suppose you set your Cruise Control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the Cruise Control. But you don’t need to reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the Cruise Control switch from “ON” to “RESUME/ACCEL” (which stands for Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second. You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. If you have the 3800 Vb engine, cruise control memory will be erased when you place the transaxle in “P” (Park). If this is If you hold the switch at “Resume/,Accel” longer than half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be startled and even lose control. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at “Resume/Accel”. To Increase Speed Wh#e Using Cruise Control : There are two ways to go to a highkr speed. Here’s the first: 0 Use the accelerator pedal to get.to the higher speed. 0 Push the button atthe end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. Features & Controls To Increase Speed While (CONT.) Using Cruise Control Here’s the second way to go to a higher speed: @ 0 To slow down in very small amounts, push the button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Passing Another Vehicle Move the Cruise switch from “ON” to While Using Cruise “RESUME/ACCEL”.Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, Control and then release the switch. Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the To increase your speed in very small pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the amounts, move the switch to “RESUME/ACCEL” for less than half Cruise Control speed you set earlier. a second and then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about Using Cruise Control on 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. Hills The accelerate feature will only work after you’ve set the initial cruise control speed by pushing the “SET” button. If you have the 3.1L V6 engine, the accelerate feature will work whether or not you have set an initial cruise control speed. To Reduce Speed While Using Cruise Control Push in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it. How well your Cruise Control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of Cruise Control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use Cruise Control on steep hills. To Get Out of Cruise Control rhere are two ways toturn off the Cruise Control: Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR 0 Move the Cruise switch to “OFF”. To Erase Speed Memory When you turn off the Cruise Control or the ignition, your Cruise Control set speed memory is erased. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, cruise control memorywill also be erased when you place the transaxle in “P” (Park). Operation of Lights Although your vehicle's lighting system (headlights, parking lights, fog lamps, side marker lights and taillights) meetall applicable federal lighting requirements, certain states and provinces may apply their own lighting regulations that may require special attention before you operate these lights. I Headlights 'ush the p' switch to turn on: 1 Parking Lights 1 Side Marker Lights D Taillights D InstrumentPanel Lights lull the switchto turn off the lights. For example, some jurisdictions may require that you operate your fog lamps only when your lower beam headlights are also on, orthat headlights be turned on whenever you must use your windshield wipers. In addition, most jurisdictions prohibit driving solely with parking lights, especially at dawn or dusk. It is recommended that you check with your own state or provincial highway authority for applicable lighting regulations. a7 ... Features & Controls The ignition is on Lights On Reminder If you turn the ignition key to the off or Lock position while leaving the lights on, you will hear a warning chime. Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) The Canadian Federal Government has decided that Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are a useful feature, in that DRL can make your vehicle more visible to pedestrians and other drivers during daylight hours. DRL are required on new vehicles sold in Canada. 0 The headlight switch is off, and 0 The parking brake is released. At dusk, the exterior lights will come on automatically and the low beams will change to full brightness. At dawn, the exterior lights will go out and the low beams will change to the reduced brightness of DRL (if the headlight switch is off). Of course, you may still turn on the headlights any time you need to. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake while the ignition is in the off or Lock position. Then start the Your DRL work with a light sensor on top vehicle. The DRL will stay off until you of the instrument panel. Don’t cover it up. release the parking brake. The low beam headlights will come on at reduced brightness in daylight when: Yeadlight High-Low Beam ?hanger :o change the headlights from low beam o high or high to low, pull the turn signal ever all the way toward you. Then elease it. Nhen the high beams are on, a blue light In the instrument panel also will be on. . interior Lights Control Slide the lower controlup to turn on the interior lights, down toturn them off. Your standard front overhead console control can be overridden by the interior lights override switch located in the console. See “Interior Lights Override Switch” in the Index. I Instrument Panel Intensity Fog Lights Controi Slide the lower control up to turn on the Slide the upper control up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights, down to decrease the brightness. Slide the control all the way down to turn them off. fog lights, down to turn them off. An amber indicator light next to the control will glow when the fog lights are on. Your headlights must be on for your fog lights to go on. Although your fog lights will go on when your high beams are on, high beams are not recommended for driving in fog. 89... Features & Controls U For Pulse Delay Wiper Cycles: The pulse delay cycle system allows you to set The windshield wiper and washer controls the wiper speed as slow as 20 seconds are located to the right of the instrument between cycles, or faster. Pulse delay cycles are very useful in light rain or cluster. snow. Slide the upper control to the For a Single Wiper Cycle: Press the “DELAY” area. The lower the position, switch marked “MIST” and release. For the slower the cycle; the higher the more cycles, press and hold the switch. position, the faster the cycle. Windshield Wipers ... 90 or Steady Wiper Cycles:Slide the pper control either to the“LO” or “HI” xition, depending on the wiper speed 3u want. I To Turn the Wipers Off: Slide the upper control to the “OFF” position. Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. Windshield Washer To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield washer switch. The washers and wipers will operate. When you release the switch, the washers will stop, and the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier. Features & Controls ng as the control is held in that position. nen thewiperwillreturnto “DEL”. NOTICE: 0 0 Rear Window Wiper and Washer To Use Your Rear Wiper: Slide the lower control to cycles. for steady wiping For a Delayed Wiper Cycle: Slide the “DEL”. lower control to 0 To Wash the Rear Window: Slide the lower control to and hold it. The washer and wiper will operate only as a ... YL Whenusing concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. Interior Lights Override Switch This switch is located to the left of the cigarette lighter on the center instrument panel console. It hastwo positions “DOOR” (on) and “OFF”, and overrides all interior lights except the reading lights. The interior lights go on each time you open the doors.You can turn off these lights so that the doors may be left open without running down the batteryby turning the interior lights override switch to “OFF”. If the interior lights override switch in the center instrument panel console is in the “OFF’ position, the overhead lights will remain off when the doors open. See “Interior Lights Override Switch” earlier in this section. There are also two lights in the liftgate to light the rear cargo area. These will come on each time youopen the liftgate, unless the interior lights override switch is in the “OFF” position. Interior Lights To turn the interior lights on when the doors are closed, slide the interior lights Your vehicle has two overhead dome control up to the “ON” position (the rear lights-one in the center of the passenger dome light switch mustbe in the on compartment and onein the rear. If you position). See “Interior Lights Control” have the optional rear climate control, you earlier in this section. will not have a center dome light. The rear dome light has an on-offswitch; the center dome light has no switch. Both lights will go on each time you open the front doors unless you have the rear light switched off. Front Reading Lights There are two reading lights located in the optional front overhead console. To turn on or off either reading light, press the switch next to it. If you have the optional power sliding door, your overhead console will also have two power sliding door switches. To operate these switches, see “Power Sliding Door” in the Index. 93... Features & Controls Rear Reading Lights Accessory Power Outlet The rear dome light also has two reading lights. The power outlet is located in the rear compartment on the driver’s side. To open, slide the latch down and remove the cover. If you have the optional saddlebags, lift the saddlebag flap to expose the latch. To turn on either reading light, press the switch next to it. The power outlet can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc. Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install. ...94 When not in use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap. NOTICE: When using the accessory power outlet: a Maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 20 amps. a Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods can drain your. battery. Air Inflator System (OPTION) Your vehicle may be equipped with an air inflator. With it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires up to the proper pressure. ’he air inflator kit is stored in a pouch in he glove box or, if you have the optional addlebags, in the driver side saddlebag. t includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an ir pressure gage, nozzle adapters and nstructions. To use your air inflator system, attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required, to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage. Then attach that end of the hose to, the object you wish to inflate. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet. Press the “ON” switch. The “ON” switch will work even with the ignition off. The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the driver’s side. The compartment door latch is located at the top of the cover. If you have the optional saddlebags, lift the flap on the saddlebag to expose the latch. To open the compartment, slide the latch down and remove the cover. 950.. Features & Controls Air Inflator System (CONK) Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about 10 minutes. To reset, press the “ON” switch again. Don’t run your air inflator for longer than 30 minutes at one time. If you do, you may damage the system. After 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the air inflator. To turn off the inflator, press “OFF” and detach the hose, first fi-om the inflated object, then from the outlet. Replace the protective cap. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in the glove box. ...96 Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror To reduce glare from lights behind you, pull the lever toward you to the night position. Convex Outside Mirror Your right side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’sseat. .' Manual Remote Control Mirrors Both the driver and passenger side outside mirrors can be adjusted with the control lever on each door so that you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position. Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward. In the rearward position, they will fold flush with the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in automatic car washes and when maneuvering your vehicle in narrow spaces. Power Remote Control The control on the driver's door controls both outside rearview mirrors. Turn the control to the left to select the driver side rearview mirror, or to the right to select the passenger side rearview mirror. Then use the control to adjust each mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position. Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward. In the rearward position, they will fold flush with the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in automatic car washes and when maneuvering your vehicle in narrow spaces. 97.. . Features & Controls Glove BoxlStorage Compartment Sun Visors To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also remove them from the center mount and swingthem to the side. If the visors swing too easily, tighten the screw on the rear of the visors. Your vehicle has a storage compartment on top of the dash anda glove box below it. To open the storage compartment, pushin the latch release, then lift the lid. ...98 To remove the ashtray for cleaning,close the lid, then grasp the rear edge of the ashtray with your fingertips and pull up and out, in a rocking motion. To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself. NOTICE: To open the glove box, pinch the latch release. The fuse panel is located inside the glove box door. See “Fuses & Circuit Breakers’ in the Index. Cup Holders1 AshtraylLighter Two cup holders, an ashtray and a lighter are located in the center instrument panel console. The foam cup holder liners can be removed for cleaning. Should the liners ever become damaged, see your dealer for replacement. To use the ashtray, lift the lid. Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element. NOTICE: Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage. 99.e. Features & Controls Locking Storage Bin At the base of the center instrument panel console is a storage bin. Use the door key to lock and unlock it. To open the bin, pinch the latch release. You may have a coinholder inside the storage bin. To replace the bin, set the hinge pins (one Rear Storage on each sideof the bin, at the bottom) into Compartment and the hinge guides (one at each side of the console opening, at the base), then close Ashtray the bin. If the hinge pins are placed The rear ashtray is located in the rear properly in the guides, the bin will close storage compartment. easily. To remove the bin for cleaning, open it part way, then pull out and slightly up. To open the ashtray, pressone side and turn it open. To clean the inside of the bin, vacuum or wipe with a slightly damp cloth. To remove the ashtray for cleaning, press the snuffer as you lift up the bottom of the ashtray. . . . 100 The side of the convenience net closest to the front ofthe vehicle is higher than the side closest the liftgate. Once you've loaded items into the net, stretch the higher side of the net up and over the top of the load to hold it firmly in place. The convenience net has a maximum capacity of 100 pounds (45 kg). It is not designed to holder larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle, as far forward as you can. I Convenience Net When not in use, we recommend that you take down the convenience net to extend (OPTION) its life and retain its elasticity, and to keep 'he optional convenience net is designed the rear exit clear. Store the net in the pouch behind either front seat or in one of 3 help keep small loads, like grocery lags, from falling over during sharp turns the optional saddlebags. r quick stops and starts. The optional saddlebags provide extra storage space. They are located at the rear of your vehicle, attached to the covers on the two rear compartments. nstall the convenience net at the rear of our vehicle,just inside the liftgate. ittach the upper loops to the posts on ither side of the liftgate opening (the lbel on the net should be in the upper ght-hand corner). Attach the lower lops to the hooks on the floor. 101 ... Features & Controls Luggage Carrier NOTICE: (OPTION) Loading cargo that weighs more than 125 pounds (56 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle. When you carry cargo on the luggage carrierof a proper size and weight, putit on the slats, as far forward as you can and distribute the load evenly along the slats. Then slide the crossrailup against the rear of the load, to help keepit from moving. You can then tie it down. If you have the optional luggage carrier, you can load things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has slats and side rails attached to the roof, sliding crossrails and places to use for tying things down. These let you load some things on top of your vehicle, so long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier. .. 102 Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your Pontiac. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in the Index. To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, check now and thento make sure the luggage carrier andcargo are still securely fastened. Your luggage carrier has release knobs set in the ends of each crossrail. Turn the release knobs counterclockwise, then slide the crossrails forward or back, as needed, to accommodate loads of varying size. Use the adjustable tiedown loops in the side rails to help secure large loads: Reposition the tiedowns by turning them counterclockwise, then slide them Along the side rail. Turn the tiedowns clodkwise to tighten them in place. . .: /’ After repositioning the crossrails, be sure to tighten the release knobs by turning them clockwise, locking the crossrails in place. Tiedowns may be removed and used in the adjustable tapped plates in the crossrails. You may also use these tapped plates to secure bicycle or ski racks. 1: 103... Features & Controls rn Electronic Level Control (OPTION) To Close the Sunroof: Pull the latch release handle forward and down, then push it back and up. Press firmly to lock the latch release handleintl the closed position. With this option, the rear of the vehicle automatically adjust to changes in load weight. (See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.) NOTICE: You may hear the compressor operating when you load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system self-adjusts. This is normal. The compressor should operate for brief periods of time. If the sound continues for an extended period of time, your vehicle needs service. To keep your battery from being drained, you may want to remove the 20-amp ELC fuse in the fuse control panel until you can get your vehicle serviced (see “Fuses & Circuit Breakers” in the Index). . . . 104 rn Sunroof (OPTION) This feature may not be available on your vehicle. The sunroof has a glass panel that opens for ventilation. To Open the Sunroof: Pull down on the latch release handle and then push it forward and up until the glass panel locks into place. The optional sunroof panel is not designed to be removed. It is made to open and close but to remain attached to the vehicle. 6 I’ I The InstrumentPanel-Your Information System 3ur instrument panel is designed to let )u know at a glance how your vehicleis nning. You’ll know how fast you’re jing, how much fuel you’re using, and any other things you’ll needto drive fely and economically. Refer to the accompanying diagrams of your instrument panel, center console and instrument cluster. 1. Exterior Lights 3. Front Fog Lamps 4. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls 5. Rear Wiper Control 2. I/P Light Dimmer IOS... Features & Controls 1. Vents 2. Parking Brake Pedal 3. Glove Compartment And Fuse Center .. 106 1. HVAC Controls 2. Rear Window Defog (Opt.) 3. Radio 4. Traction Control Switch (Opt.) 5. Courtesy Lamp Override 6. Cigar Lighter 7. Rear HVAC Controls (Opt.) 8. Open Storage Area 9. Ashtray 10. Locking Storage Bin 11. Bucket, Removes For Cleaning 12. Air Vent 107.. . Features & Controls Engine Instrument Panel Cluster 7. Voltage Gage 14. High Beam Indicator 15. Service Traction Control 1. Traction Control “ON” 8. Oil Pressure Indicator 3.1 L (Shown)/Oil Pressure Gage 3800 (Similar) 2. Service Air Bag 9. Tachometer four cluster includes indicator warning ights and gages that are explained on the ollowing pages. 3. Service Engine Soon 4. Sliding Door Ajar Symbol 5. Liftgate Ajar 6. Park Brake/Fluid Level Indicator . e . I08 IO. Seat Belts 11. Right Turn Signal 12. Service Antilock Brakes 13. Speedometer 16. Left Turn Signal 17. Odometer 18. Trip Odometer Reset 19. Trip Odometer 20. Fuel Gage 21. Low Fuel Warning 22. Coolant Temperature Gage Tamper Resistant Odometer Your Pontiac has a tamper resistant odometer. If you see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know that someone has probably tried to turn it back, so the numbers may not be true. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But Speedometer and Tachometer if it can’t, then it’s setat zero and a label Odometer The tachometer displays the enginespeed must be put on the driver’s door to show in revolutions per minute (rpm). Your speedometer lets you see your speed the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed. in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). Your NOTICE: odometer shows how far your vehicle has Do not operate the engine with the been driven, in either miles (usedin the tachometer in the red area, or engine U.S.) or kilometers (usedin Canada). damage may occur. 109. .. Features & Controls H Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators This section describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero. To set it to zero, push the reset button located above the fuel gage. ... 110 Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights go on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you turn the ignition key just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. Sages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s Functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows theremay be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow the manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage: At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads “F” (Full). Fuel Gage Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left, when the ignition is on. When the gage first indicates “E” (Empty), you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. Low Fuel Warning Light The gage moves a little when you turn a corner, brake or speed up. When there is between 3 gallons (1 1 liters) and 0.5 gallon (1.8 liters) of The gage doesn’t go back to “E” when fuel left in the tank, the warning light next to the fuel symbol will go on. you turn off the ignition. For your fuel tank capacity, see “Service Station Information’’ on the last page of this manual. This light will also come on when you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running, to show you it is working. If it doesn’t come on as you start your vehicle, have it fixed right away. 111 ... Features & Controls '/ H 4 i WJ -1 I20 'I / ,1 Ys 0 0-c w Oil Pressure Indicator (3.I L V6 Engine) Your vehicle is equipped with an oil pressure indicator rather than an oil pressure gage. Your oil pressure indicator lets you know when you may have a problem with your engine oil pressure. When the engine is running, readings within the whte graduation band indicate the normal operating range. Readings in or below the red area indicate that the engine's oil level may be dangerously low, or there may be another problem causing low oil pressure. Driving your vetucle with lowoil pressure can cause extensive engine damage. Have your vehicle serviced immediately. ... 112 I NOTICE: Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty. Oil Pressure Gage (3800 V6 Engine) Your oil pressure gage shows the oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature andoil viscosity. In fact, while the engine is warming up, the oil pressure will be higher than at the normal operating temperature. Readings above the red warning zone indicate the normal operating range. I If- - the gage readsin the red warning zone, your engine’s oil level may be dangerously low or there may be another problem causing low oil pressure. Driving your vehiclewith low oil pressure can cause extensive engine damage. Have your vehicle serviced immediately. Voltmeter NOTICE: Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Your charging system gage will show the rate of charge when the engine is running. This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves The reading will change as therate of charge changes (with engine speed, etc.), into the red area, your engine is too hot! It means that your engine coolant has. but readings between the red warning overheated. If you have been operating zones indicate the normal operating your vehicle under normal driving range. Readings in either red zone conditions, you should pull off the road, indicate a possible problem with your stop your vehicle and turn off the engine charging system. Have your Pontiac as soon as possible. serviced immediately. HOT COOLANT CAN BURN YOU When the engine is not running but the BADLY! ignition is on(in the Run position), the clisplay measures the voltage output of In “Problems on the Road”, this manual your battery. shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. 113 ... Features & Controls I carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is stillon, or if the anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Pontiac” in the Index.) Brake System Warning Light Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Your Pontiac’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. With anti-lock, this light will go on when you start your engine andit will stay on for three seconds. That’s normal.If the light doesn’t come on, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn you if there is a problem. If the warning light comes on, there coulc be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. This light should come on as you start thc vehicle. If it doesn’t come on then, have i fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop .. 114 The brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake, and-it will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. Pull off the road and stop carefully.You may notice that the pedalis harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. Have the vehicle towed for service. (See “TowingYour Pontiac” in the Index.) I A CAUTION: I Your regular brake systemmay not be working properly if the anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock brake system warning light fashing can lead to an accident. After you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. ~~~ ~~~~ ~~ ~~~~~~~ LOW TRACTION traction control system limits wheel spin for less than four seconds. Otherwise, the light will go out as soon as the anti-lock system stops ad-justing brake pressure or the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. The “LOW TRACTION” light also comes on briefly, a s a bulb check, when the engine is started. I I NOTICE: ~ If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on when you’re driving, stop as soon a s possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or conles on again while you’re driving, your Pontiac needs service. If the light is on but not flashing and the regular brake system warning light isn’t on. you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. Low Traction Light (OPTION: 3800 V6 ENGINE) If your vehicle has the traction control system, there will be a ”LOW TRACTION” light on the instrument panel. It is located above the “AIR RAG” light. When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid. or when your traction control system is limiling wheel spin, the “LOW TRACTION” light will come o n . Slippery road conditions may exist if this light comes on. so adjust your driving accordingly. The light will come on and stay on for four seconds when your anti-lock system adjusts brake pressure f o r less than four seconds or when your Spinning your wheels when the “TCS” warning light is on can destroy parts of your vehicle as well a s the tires. If you spin you wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth. you can destroy your transaxle. When you‘re stuck. spin the wheels a s little as possible. 115 ... Features & Controls If the “TCS” warning light comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time, your vehicle needs service. . Traction Control System Warning Light (OPTION: 3800 V6 ENGINE) The “TCS” (Traction Control System) warning light means that the system is not working. The “TCS” warning light may come on if your brakes overheat. This means that your traction control system has temporarily shut down to allow the brakes to cool. (The control system will not shut down while it is actively controlling wheel spin.) When the brakes have cooled down, the “TCS” warning light will go off. . 116 . Walfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light) 1 computer monitors operation of your uel, ignition and emission control ,ystems.This light should come on whe:n he ignition is on, but the engine is not ,unning, as a check to show you it is vorking. If it does not come on atall, lave itkxed right away. If it stays on, or t comes on while you are driving, the :omputer is indicating that you havea Jroblem. You should take your vehicle in for service soon. NOTICE: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while^ the emission controls won’t work as well, your fuel economy won’t beas good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. Liftgate Ajar Warning Light The liftgate ajar symbol on your instrument panel will come on if your liftgate is not completely closed. 117... Features & Controls Sliding Door Ajar Warning Light With the optional power sliding door, the sliding door ajar symbol on your instrument panel will come on if your sliding door is not completely closed. If you shift the transaxle out of“P” (Park while the sliding door is open or i n the process of closing, and the power sliding door enable switch is in the “ON” position, the sliding door ajar symbol light will flash and a buzzer will sound. This is a warning that the sliding door is not completely closed. ... 118 tf you manually slam the power sliding door shut when the ignition is on, the sliding door ajar symbol warning light may come on and stay on. To turn the light off, reopen and close the door using either power door switch, or manually open and close the door again more slowly. Part 3 Comfort Controls & Audio Systems I n this part you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control systems and audio systems offered with your Pontiac. Be sure to read about the particular system supplied with your vehicle . . . . 120 Climate Control System Quick Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Heater and Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defogging and Defrosting .. ......................... . . . . . 127 Rear Window Defogger ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Setting the Clock .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 131 AM/FM Stereo Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/FM Stereo with Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 AM/FM Stereo with Cassette Player and Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 AM/FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 CD Player Anti-Theft Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 143 Steering Wheel Touch Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Radio Reception .......................... . . . . . . . . 144 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Care Your of Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Integrated Roof Antenna .......... ....... . . . . . . . . . . . 146 119 C ... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems Climate Control System Quick Reference Guide Your Climate Control System has been designed to provide an expanded range of comfort options. Use ,thisdiagram as a quick reference guide for operating the controls. For a complete explanation of this system, see “Climate Control System” later in this section. SUGGESTED OPERATlNG MODES: FRONTFANCONTROL LEVER - A/C (Air Conditioning) Press to turn the A/C on and off. - R. DEF (Rear Defog) Press to defog the rear window. DIRECTIONAL CONTROLS OFF Press to turnthe system -A lighted button lets Off. you know thata selected control is on. FRONT TEMPERATURE CONTROL LEVER REAR FAN FOR HEAT, USE FOR VENT (OUTSIDE AIR), USE 7 U OFF REAR LO MED HI u FOR MAX COOLING, USE FOR OTHER AlC OPTIONS, USE These positions allow the driver to adjust the rear This position transfers controlof the rearfan to the second row passenger (for vehicles with the Rear Climate Control option only). .. . I20 OFF: Press to turn the system off. Press any function to turn the system on. The “BI-LEV” setting directs outside air into your vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your upper body : Slide the lever to theright to through the front instrument panel outlets, increase fan speed, to the left to decrease while warmed air is directed through the fan speed. heater ducts at your feet. At times this temperature difference may be more Temperature Control Lever: Slide the apparent than others. For the best results, lever to the right for warmer, heated air; slide the temperature control lever to the slide it to the left for cooled air. middle position, and then adjust it for UPPER: This setting brings in outside air comfort. through the instrument panel outlets. You LOWER: This setting brings in most may the air using the temperature Heater andVentilation controlwarm heated air through the heater ducts, and lever. some through the defroster vents. System BI-LEV (Bi-Level): This setting is Your vehicle’s heater will work bestif designed for use on sunny days when the MIX: Because of your Trans Sport’s larger windshield area, this mode is you keep your windows closed. Your air is only moderately warm or cool. On particularly useful during cold or vehicle also has flow-through ventilation, days like these, the sun may adequately inclement weather. Press to direct warmed described later in this section, to bring warm your upper body, but your lower air to the windshield and through the outside air into your vehicle. body may not be warm enough. heater ducts. If you have the optional engine coolant DEF (Defrost): Press to direct most heater and use it during cold weather,0°F warmed air to the windshield and side (- 18“C) or lower, your heating system window vents. will more quickly provide heat because the engine coolantis already warmed. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. 3f I ~ ~ I21 e ... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems To maintain a comfortable temperaturein he rear area without making the front Iassengers uncomfortable, adjust the front a n speed first, then adjust the emperature setting. To turn off the rear fan, slide the control o “OFF”. Heater and Ventilation Rear Fan System (CONK) The control for the rear fan is located If your vehicle is equipped with seats in the third row, you willhave a rear air outlet and a rear fan. To maximize air flow to the rear ofyour vehicle, place the left second row bucket seat in the forward position (see “Adjusting Rear Seats” in the Index). This uncovers the rear air outlet. Also keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console and the area between and under the front seats free of objects that could obstruct air flow to therear. . .. ILL below the audio system. First, select “LOWER’, “BI-LEV” or “MIX” to direct air flow to the rear air outlet and to the rear side windows. Use the temperature control lever to adjust th temperature setting. Then, select the forc of air you want, from “LO” to “HI”, by sliding the rear fan control to the desired setting. OFF: Press to turn the system off. Press any climate control setting to turn the system on. 8 : Slide the leverto the right to increase fan speed, to the left to decrease fan speed. Temperature Control Lever: Slide the lever to the right for warmer, heated air; slide it to the left for cooled air. Air Conditioner When the temperature outside is above (OPTION) freezing, the air conditioner compressor will automatically condition the air when Your vehicle’s heater and air conditioner you press “RECIRC” (the“A/C” indicator work best if you keep your windows light will glow), “MIX” or “DEF”(the closed. Your vehicle also has “A/,,’ indicator light will not glow). flow-through ventilation, described later in this section, to bring outside airinto Press “A/C” (the “A/C” indicator light your vehicle. will glow) to condition the air when you press “UPPER’, “BI-LEV” or If you have the optional engine coolant “LOWER”. To turn off the air conditioner heater and use it during cold weather,0°F compressor in these settings, press “A/C7’ (- 18O C>or lower, your heating system again (the indicator light will go off‘). will more quickly provide heat because the engine coolant is already warmed. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. Each time you turn on the ignition, the air conditioner will default to the setting you had selected before last turning off the ignition. When the air conditioner compressor is on, you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine performance and power. This is normal, because the system is designed to help fuel economy while it maintains the desired cooling level. The air conditioner removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice water dripping from under your vehicle when it is idling or after it has been turned off. This is normal. On very hot days, your vehicle will .cool down more quickly and economically if you open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape. For all settings, adjust the temperature control lever and fan speed as desired. 123 ... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems Directional Controls The “BI-LEV” setting directs outside air .nto your vehicle in two ways. Cooler air RECIRC (Recirculate): Press to get 1s directed toward your upper body maximum cooling or quick cool-down on :hrough the front instrument panel outlets, very hot days. This setting recirculates while warmed air is directed through the much of the air inside your vehicle. It heater ducts at your feet. At times this should not be used for long periods of temperature difference may be more time because the air may become too cold apparent than others. For best results, and dry. slide the temperature control lever to the it for Slide the temperature control lever down middle position, and then adjust comfort. to the coolest setting and adjust the fan speed as desired. LOWER: This setting brings in most heated air through the heater ducts, and UPPER: For normal cooling on hot days, some through the defroster vents. press “A/C” along with “UPPER”. This setting cools outside air and directs it MIX: Because of your Trans Sport’s through the instrument panel outlets. larger windshield area, this mode is Adjust the temperature of the air with the particularly useful during cold or temperature control lever. inclement weather. Press to direct warmed lir to the windshield and through the BI-LEV (Bi-Level): This setting is designed for use on sunny days when the heater ducts. air is only moderately warm or cool. On days like these, the sun may adequately warm your upper body, but your lower body may not be warm enough. .. 124 DEF (Defrost): Press to direct most warmed air to the windshield and side window vents. If your vehicle is equippedwith seats in the third row, youwill have a rear air outlet and a rear fan. To maximize air flow to the rear of your vehicle, place the left second row bucket seatin the forward position (see “Adjusting Rear Seats” in the Index). This uncovers the rear air outlet. Also keep the area around the base of the center instrument panel console and the area between and under the front seats free of objects that could obstructair flow to the rear. Comfort Controls & Audio Systems Rear Climate Control System (OPTION) (CONT.) will be directed to the rear of the vehicle :hrough the overhead andthird-row air -0nditioning outlets. If you select “A/C” in the “LOWER” mode, cooled air will be Sirected through the rear floor vent unless the temperature control lever is set approximately 30% from the full cold setting. Heated air will result with the temperature control lever setting above 30% from the full cold setting. However, temperature adjustment of the heated air is not possible. Cooled air will return when the temperature control lever setting is returned to approximately 25% from the full cold setting. (See “Rear Air Vents” later in this section). Rear Air Vents Rear Fan-Master Control To maximize air flow through the rear heater outlet, place the left second row bucket seat or the bench seat in the forward position (see “Adjusting Rear Seats” in the Index). The master control for the rear fan is located below the audio system. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the rear area, select the force of air you want, from “LO” to “HI”, by sliding the The vent forward of the rear heater outlet control to the desired setting. If you do not select “A/,” in the is the cold air return vent. Be sure to keel “UPPER” or “BI-LEV” modes, air To transfer control of the rear fan to the it free of obstructions. directed to the rear of the vehicle will be rear control switch, slide the master cabin temperature. Also keep the area around the baseof the control to “REAR”. The rear control switch will not operate when the master center instrument panel console and the Select “LOWER’, “MIX” or “DEF’ when control is in any other position. area between and underthe front seats outside temperatures are cool. In these free of objects that could obstruct air f l o ~ modes, heated air will be directed to the To turn off the rear fan, slide the master to the rear. rear of the vehicle through the rear side control to “OFF’. window vents and the rearfloor heater vent. ... 126 Rear Fan-Rear Control Defogging and Defrosting This feature allows passengers riding in the rear seatsto control the flowof air to the rear areaof the vehicle. To rapidly defrost the windshield, slide the temperature control lever all the way to “WARM” and press “DEF”. The rear control switch is locatedon the armrest next to the second row seat, left position. The rear fan master control on the instrument panel must bein the “REAR” position for the rear control switch to operate. Adjust the fan to the highest speed. To keep the windshield clear and bring in heated air through the heater ducts, press Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger vents located on the top. of the instrument panel. For additional side window defogging, press the “BI-LEV” button and adjust the fan to the highest speed. Aim the side vents on the instrument panel toward the side windows. For increased air flow to the side vents, close the center vents. “~1x97. When the temperature outside is above freezing, the air conditioner compressor Select the forceof air you want, from “LO” to “HI”, by turning the switch to the will run in these settings to help remove moisture from the air. desired setting.To turn the rear fanoff, turn the switch to “OFF”. The rear fan can also be turned off at the mastercontrol. 127.. . Comfort Controls & Audio Systems Do not attach a temporary vehicle licenst icross the defogger grid on the rear window. NOTICE: Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Rear Window Defogger (OPTION) Press “R. DEF” (Rear Defog) to warm the defogger grid on the rear window. The indicator light will glow while the rear window defogger is operating. The rear window defogger will turn off automatically after about 10 minutes of use. If you turn it on again, the defogger will operate for about five minutes only. You can also turn the defoggeroff by turning off the ignition or pressing the switch again. ... 128 =/ow=Through Ventilation system lour vehicle’s flow-through ventilation ystem supplies outside air into the rehicle when it is moving. Outside air vi11 also enter the vehiclewhen the heater )r the air conditioning fan is running. Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing 'can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it. To help avoid hearing loss or damage: Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. Ventilation Tips: 0 Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or any other obstruction (such as leaves).The heater and ddffoster will work far better, reducing the chance of foggingthe inside of your windows. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. 129... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems w Audio Systems (CONT) NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio -- be sure’you can add what you want.If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco@radio or other systems, and even damage them. And, your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. ... 130 Setting the CIock For radios with 4 “SEEK’ b: 1. With the radio on or off, press “SET”. The “SET” indicator will appear on 1. With the radio on or off, press “SET”. the digital display for five seconds. The “SET” indicator will appear on You must begin to set the clock to the the digital display for five seconds. correct hour and minute during those five seconds. You must begin to set the clock to the correct hour and minute during those 2. Press and hold 4 “SEEK” until the five seconds. correct hour appearson the display. 2. Press and hold v “SEEK” until the 3. Press and hold “SEEK’ b until the correct hour appears on the display. correct minute appears on the display. 3. Press and hold “SEEK”A until the correct minute appears on the display. For radios with v “SEEK’A : BAL (Balance): The control ring behind the upper knob adjusts the lefthight speaker balance. Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does two things: 0 Turn it to tune in radio stations. 0 Press it to change between the AM and FM bands (the digital screen will momentarily display AM or FM, and indicate if the radio is in stereo). FADE: The control ring behind the lower AM/FM Stereo Radio The digital display indicates information on time or radio station frequency, the AM or FM radio band, whether the station is in stereo, and other radio functions. Upper Knob (PWRoVOL): This knob does four things: 0 Turn it to turn the system on and off (your ignition must be on). knob adjusts the front/rear speaker balance. !.... .' Turn it to control the volume. When the radio is on, press it to recall the station frequency to the digital display screen. 0 When the ignition is off, press it to display the clock. 131 ... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems AM/FM Stereo Radio (C0;NT.) SEEK A : Press to seek and stop on the next station higher or lower on the radio band. rREB (Treble): Slide this lever up to ncrease treble, or down to decrease it. If I station is weak or noisy, reduce the reble. BASS: Slide this lever up to increase ,ass, or down to decrease it. J p to three additional stations on each )and may be preset by “pairing” Jushbuttons: 1. Tune in the desired station. You can also use the “SEEK” buttons to scan radio stations up or down the AM or FM bands. I‘o Preset Radio Stations: 2. Press “SET”, and within five seconds press any two adjacent pushbuttons at the same time. I . Tune in the desired station. 3. The station canbe tuned in when the To scan stations up the band, press and hold “SEEK”A , thenpress “SEEK”, then release both buttons. The radio will go to the next station and pause there for a few seconds. It will continue to scan until you press either “SEEK” button. 2. Press “SET”. The word “SET” will appear on the digital screen for five seconds. 3. While “SET” is displayed, press one of the four pushbuttons. To scan stations down the band, press and 4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each of four AM and four FM stations. hold “SEEK”, thenpress “SEEK’A , then release both buttons. The radio will go to the next station and pause there for a few seconds. It will continue to scan until you press either “SEEK” button. .. 132 same two pushbuttons are pressed at the same time. BAL (Balance): The control ring behind the upper knob adjusts the left/right speaker balance. Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does two things: Turn it to tune in radio stations. 0 Press it to change between the AM and FM bands (the digital screen will momentarily display AM or FM, and indicate if the radio is in stereo). FADE: The control ring behind the lower knob adjusts the front/rear speaker balance. AMIFM Stereo with Cassette Player Upper Knob (VOL): This knob does four things: Turn it to turn the system on and off (your ignition must be on). The digital display indicates information on time or radio station frequency, the AM or FM radio band, whether the station is in stereo, and other radio functions. Turn it to control the volume. When the radio is on, press it to recall the station frequency to the digital display screen. 0 When a tape is playing, press it to hear the other side of the tape. 133... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems AM/FM Stereo with Cassette Player(CONK) TREBLE: Slide this lever up to increase treble, or down to decrease it. If a station is weak or noisy, reduce the treble. To scan stations up the band, pressand “SEEK”, 1old “SEEK’A ,thenpress :hen release both buttons. The radio will go to the next station and pause there for few seconds. It will continue to scan until you press either “SEEK” button. To scan stations down the band, press and hold v “SEEK”, then press “SEEK’A , then release both buttons. The radio will v SEEK A : Press to seek and stop on the go to the next station and pause there for next station higher or lower on the radio a few seconds. It will continue to scan band. until you press either “SEEK” button. You can also use the “SEEK’ buttons to scan radio stations up or down the AM or FM bands. BASS: Slide this lever up to increase bass, or down to decrease it. .* 134 I’o Preset Radio Stations: Up to three additional stations on each band may be preset by “pairing” pushbuttons: 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press “SET”, and within five seconds press any two adjacent pushbuttons at the same time. 3. The station can be tuned in when the same two pushbuttons. are pressed at the same time. Fast Forward: Press the button with the arrow pointing in the same direction that the tape is playing. To stop fast forward, lightly press the “STOP-EJECT” button. Reverse: Press the button with the arrow pointing in the opposite direction that the tape is playing. To stop reverse, lightly press the “STOP-EJECT” button. STOP-EJECT To stop playing a tape, To Play a Cassette Tape: With the power switch on,insert.a tape into the cassette door.Do not use tapes that are longer than 45 minutes on each side. When the right indicator arrow is lit, selections listed on the bottomside of the cassette are playing. When the left arrow is lit, selections listed on the top side of the cassette are playing. To change sides of the tape while thecassette is playing, press the upper knob. When theend of a tape is reached, the other side will then Play- fully press this button (the cassette will be partially ejected, and the radio will begin playing). 135... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does two things: AIWIFM Stereo with Cassette Playerand Graphic Equalizer The digital display indicates information on time or radio station frequency, the AM or FM radio band, whether the station is in stereo, and other radio functions. PWR (Power): Press to turn the unit on and off when the ignition is on. 0 Turn it slightly to the leftor right to tune in radio stations. If you hold it to the left or right, it will tune rapidly. You can also turn it one stop at a time to fine-tune a specific frequency. 0 Press to change between the AM, FMl or FM2 bands. (FMl allows you to preset five stations, FM2 allows you to preset anotherfive stations.) The band you select will momentarily appear on the digital display, and indicate if the radio is in stereo. Upper Knob (VOL): This knob doestwc Your radio has an AMAX-certified things: receiver. It can produce quality AM stereo 0 Turn it slightly to the left or right to sound and receiveC-Quam’ stereo control the volume. broadcasts. AMAX reduces noise without reducing the high frequencies you need 0 Press it to mute the radio or tape for the best sound.You don’t have todo player. Press again to listen. anything to your Delco/GM radio because BAL (Balance): The control ring behind AMAX is automatic. the upper knob adjusts the left/right FADE: The control ring behind the lower speaker balance. knob adjusts the front/rear speaker balance. 4 SEEK b:Press “SEEK” b to seek and stop on the next station higher on the radio band. Press4 “SEEK” to seek and stop on the next station lower on the band. RCL (Recall): Press to alternate the display between the time and theselected station and radio band. EQUALIZER: Boost the bass, emphasize a voice in a song, brighten the treble -your equalizer gives you freedom to adjust five separate frequencies of sound to your individual taste. Move a lever. upto emphasize a frequency, move it down to de-emphasize. It’s best to begin with the levers in the middle position, then adjust each lever as you like. To. Preset Radio Stations: 1..Tune the digital display to the station you want. 2. Press’“SET”. The “SET” indicator will appear on the digital screen for five seconds. 3. While the “SET” indicator is displayed, press one of the five pushbuttons. The five pushbuttons under the cassette entry door can be used topreset up to 15 4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each of five AM and five FM stations. radio stations (five AM, five FM1 and five FM2). The buttons have other uses 5. Press the lower knob until FM2 when you are playing a tape (see “TOPlay appears on the digital display. You can a Cassette Tape” later in this section). then follow steps 1-3 for fivemore ,, I. . FM stations. %.’ ’, r l i &.b ,. .-A. I, I..: Comfort Controls& Audio Systems This system has automatic Dolby B NR’ to reduce background noise on Dolby encoded tapes. Dolby@Noise Reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby@and the symbol 00 are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. AMIFM Stereo with Cassette Player and Graphic Equalizer(CONT.) To Play a Cassette Tape: Press “PWR” to turn the radio on. The radio will play until a cassette is pushed into the cassette entry door (the tape side goes in first). Do not use tapes that are longer than 90 minutes (45 minutes on each side). .. 138 PROG (Program): Press to change the side of tape being played. When the end of a tape is reached, the other side will then play. Cr02: This button sets tape bias. When playing high bias chrome or metal tapes, press the button to turn the Cr02 display on. When playing standard tapes, press again to turn the display off. REV (Reverse): Press to reverse the tape rapidly; press again to play the tape. (The radio plays while a tape is rewinding.) FWD (Fast Forward): Press to advance [he tape rapidly; press again to play. (The radio plays while the tape is advancing.) PREV (Previous): Press “PREV” to repeat a passage. The tapewill back up and stop at the first four-second quiet spot in the tape, or when you press “PREV” sgain or “PROG”. NEXT Press to go to the next selection on the tape. The tape will stop at the first four-second quiet spot in the tape, or when you press “NEXT” again or ”PROG”. SToPL (StopoPlay): Press to switch from the tape to the radio. Press againto resume playing the tape. EJECT Press to eject the cassette tape (the radio will then play). Lower Knob (TUNE): This knob does two things: 0 AM/FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Graphic Equalizer The digital display indicates information on time or radio station frequency,the, AM or FM radio band, whether the station is in stereo, and other radio functions. PWR (Power): Turns the unit on and off when the ignition is on. Turn it slightly to the left or right to tune in radio stations. If you hold it to the left or right, it will tune rapidly. You can also turn it one stop at a time to fine-tune a specific frequency. Press to change between the AM, FM1 or FM2 bands. (FMl allows you to preset five stations, FM2 allows you to preset another five stations.) The digital screen will momentarily display AM, FMl or FM2, and indicate if the radio is in stereo. Upper Knob (VOL): This knob does two Your radio has an AMAX-certified things: receiver. It can produce quality AM stereo 0 Turn it slightly to the left or right to sound and receive C-Quam@ stereo control the volume. broadcasts. AMAX reduces noise without reducing the high frequencies you need Press it to mute the radio or compact for the best sound. You don’t have to do disc player. Press again to listen. anything to your Delco/GM radio because BAL (Balance): The control ring behind AMAX is automatic. the upper knob adjusts the left/right speaker balance. 139... Comfort Controls& Audio Systems 3. While the “SET” indicator is displayed, AM/FM Stereo with Compact Disc Playerand Graphic Equalizer(CONT.) press one of the five pushbuttons. 4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each of five AM and five FM stations. FADE: The control ring behind the lower knob adjusts the front/rear speaker balance. 5. Press the lower knob until FM2 appears on the digital display.You can then follow steps 1-3 for five more FM stations. 4 SEEK b: Press to seek and stop on the next station higher or lower on the radio band. RCL (Recall): Press to alternate the display between the time and the selected station and radio band. EQUALIZER: Boost the bass, emphasize avoice in a song, brighten the treble - your equalizer gives you freedom to adjust five separate frequencies of sound to your individual taste. Move a lever up to emphasize a frequency, move it down to de-emphasize. It’s best to begin with the levers in the middle position, then adjust each lever as you like. ... 140 To Play a Compact Disc: The five numbered pushbuttons can be lsed to preset up to 15 radio stations five AM, five-FM1and five FM2). The buttons have other uses when you are )laying a compact disc (see “TOPlay a Zompact Disc” later in this section). ro Preset Radio Stations: 1. Tune the digital display to thestation you want. 2. Press “SET”. The “SET” indicator will appear on the digital screen for five seconds. Many of the controls for the radio also have functions for the compactdisc player, as explained here. Don’t use mini-discs that are called singles. They won’t eject. Use only full-size compact discs. 1. Press “PWR” toturn the radio on. 2. Insert a disc part-way into the slot, with the label side up. The player will pull it in. In a few seconds, the disc should play. If the disc comes back out and/or“Err” appears on the display: The disc may be upside down. The disc may be dirty, scratched or wet. There may be too much moisture in the air (wait about one hour and try again). STePL (StopoPlay): Press to stop the disc player; the radio will play.Press again to play the disc (the player will start REV (Reverse): Press and hold to rapidly playing the disc where it was stopped back up to a favorite passage. Release to earlier). resume playing. EJCT (Eject): Press to eject the disc; the FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to radio will play. rapidly advance the disc. Release to resume playing. CD Player Anti-Theft RDM (Random): Press to play tracks in random order. PREV (Previous): Press to play a track The player may be too hot, or the road again. If you keep pressing the “PREV” may be too rough for the disc to play. button, the disc will keep backing up to As soon as things get back to normal, previous’tracks. the disc should play. NEXT Press when you wantto hear the While a disc is playing, the “CD” next track. If you keep pressing the indicator is displayed on the digital “NEXT” button, the disc will keep screen, as is the clock. advancing to other tracks. RCL (Recall): Press once to see what When Finished with the Compact Disc track is playing. Press again within five Player: seconds’tosee how long your selection has.been playing. The track number also If you press “PWR” or turn off the will be displayed when the volume is ignition, the disc will stay in the player changed or a new track starts to play. and start again when you turn on the COMP (Compression): Depressing this ignition or power switch. The disc will button makes soft and loud passages more begin playing at the point where it had been stopped. equal in volume. Press again to resume normal play. Feature Delco-LOC II@is a security feature for the compact disc player. It can be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally. If it is used, your player won’t be usable if it is ever stolen, because it will go to “LOC” mode any time batFery power is removed. Until an un “LOC” code is entered, it will not turn on. . The instructions below tell you how to enter a secret code into the system. If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason, you must unlock the system with the secret code before the radio will turn on. 141 ... Comfort Controls & Audio Systems CD Player Anti-Theft Feature (CONI) 2. 3. 4. button to make the first number appear. I’o Unlock the System Aftera Power Loss: 7. Rotate the lower (“TUNE’) knob right When battery power is reapplied to a secured radio, the radio won’tturn on and or left to make the last two numbers “LOC” will appear on the display. Enter agree with your code. Write down any six-digit number and your secret code as follows; pause no keep it in a safe place. B. Press the lower (“BAND’) knob and more than 15 seconds between steps. “000” will appear again. Now you are Turn the ignition to the Accessory or 1. Turn the ignition on. (Radiooff.) ready to enter the last three digits of Run position. your code. 2. Press the “SET” button. The display Press the “PWR” button to turn the will show “000”. 9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the last three radio off. digits of your code. 3. Enter the six digits of the code Press the “1” and “4” buttons together. following steps 6-9 above. The 1O.Press the lower (“BAND’) knob and Hold them down until “- - -” shows display will show the numbers as “REP” will appear for five seconds on the display (at least five seconds). entered. and then “000” will appear. You are ready to enter your secret code. 11.Repeat steps 6 through 10. This time 4. Press the lower (“BAND’) knob and the time appears, indicating that the “SEC” will appear, indicating that the NOTE: If you allow more than 15 disabling sequence was successful.If radio is secure. seconds to elapse between any steps, the display indicates “SEC”, the the radio automatically reverts to time numbers did not match and the unit is and you must start the procedure over still secured. at step 4. To Set the Anti-Theft System: 1. E. Press the “SEEK” 5. Press “SET” and “OOO” will appear on the display. ... 142 Disabling the Anti-Theft System: 4. Press the lower (“BAND”) knob. The radio will display “000” 1. Press the “1” and “4” buttons together for five seconds with ignition on and 5. Enter the second three digits of the radio power off. The display will code. The display will show the show “SEC”, indicating theunit is in numbers as entered. the secure mode. (If“- - -” appears on the display, the anti-theft system has 6. Press the lower (“BAND”) knob. If the display shows “- - -” then the already been disabled.) time, the disabling sequence was successful (the numbers matched the 2. Press the “SET” button. The display will show “000”. user-selected code or the factory back-up code) and the unit is in the 3. Enter the first three digits of the code “UNSECURED” mode. If the display Steering Wheel Touch following steps6 and 7 of the shows “SEC”, the disabling sequence Controls (OPTION) preceding paragraphs. The display was unsuccessful and the numbers did will show the numbers as entered. not match either of the codes and the Some audio system functions can be unit will remain in the “SECURED” operated with these controls. mode. AM/FM: Press to select either the AM or FMl and FM2 radio bands. The band you select will be displayed on the digital screen. The frequency of the station will be displayed, and if the station is in stereo, the stereo indicator will also be displayed. 143.. . Comfort Controls & Audio Systems Steering Wheel Touch COntrOlS (OPTION) (CONI) Understanding Radio Reception SEEK: Each time you press an up or down arrow on “SEEK”, you will tune in the next station up or down the AM or FM radio band. FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interferewith FM signals, causing the sound to come and go. When listening to a cassette tape or compact disc, you can change to the previous or next selection by pressing the “SEEK” up or down arrow. RCL (Recall): When the radio is on, press to change between the clock and the radio station frequency displayed on the digital screen. AM The range for mostAM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night.The longer range, however, can cause stations VOL (Volume): Press A to increase to interfere with each other. AM can also volume. Press to lowerthevolume. pick up noise from things like storms and PWR: Turns the unit on and off when the power lines. To lower this noise, try reducing the treble level. ignition is on. PRE-SET Press this to hear the radio stations that are set on your system. AM Stereo Your Delco@system may be able to receive C-Quam@stereo broadcasts. Many AM stations around the country use C-Quam@to produce stereo, though some do not. C-Quam@is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc. If your Delco@system can get C-Quam@signals, your stereo indicator light will come on when you are receiving it. .. 144 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape A tape player that is not cleaned regularly head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject. It may not clean as thoroughly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined as the scrubbing type cleaner. cassettes, or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their Cassettes are subject to wear and the cases away from contaminants, direct sound quality and may degrade over time. sunlight, and extreme heat. if they aren’t, Always make sure that the cassette tape is they may not operate properly or cause in good condition before you have your failure of the tape player. tape player serviced. Your tape player should be cleaned after Care of Your Compact every 50 hours or use. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known Discs good cassette to see if the tape or the tape Handle discs carefully. Store them in their player is at fault. Ifthis other cassette has original cases or other protective cases no improvement in sound quality, clean and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the tape player. the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral action non-abrasive cleaning cassette. This detergent solution and clean it, wiping system uses a cleaning cassette with pads from the center to the edge. which scrub the tape headas the hubs of Be sure never to touch the signal surface the cleaner cassette turn.It is normal for when handling discs. Pick up discs by the cartridge to eject while cleaning. Insert grasping the outer edges or the edgeof the cassette at least 3 times to ensure the hole and the outer edge. thorough cleaning.A scrubbing action cleaning cassette is available through your Chevrolet dealership. 145.. . Comfort Controls & Audio Systems NOTICE: Don’t mount anything to your roof, such as an antenna or a luggage carrier, or to your headliner. If you puncture the roof or headliner, you could damage or destroy your integrated roof antenna. Have any work of this type done by your dealer. Integrated Roof Antenna Your state-of-the-art integrated roof antenna is not visible. It is located between the roof and headliner of your vehicle, covering the entire roof area frorr the rear edge of the front doors to the liftgate. ’ you want to add a mobile phone or No-way radio to your vehicle, there are 3ecial precautions you’ll need to take. ee “Adding Sound Equipment” in the Idex. Part 4 Your Driving and the Road H e r e YOU’IIfind information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving. I DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..151 Anti-LockBrakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 TractionControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 SteeringTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Steering in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 DrivingatNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 CityDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 FreewayDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 164 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 TowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 147 ... Your Driving and the Road Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your Pontiac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. w Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. Alcohol takes away three things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: Judgment Muscular Coordination The Blood Alcohol Content(BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: How much alcohol is in the drink. Vision Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol - a driver, a passenger or someone else, such as a pedestrian, had Rear-end collisions are about the most been drinking. In most cases, these deaths preventable of accidents. Yet they are are the result of someone who was common. Allow enough following drinking and driving. About 20,000 motor distance. It’s the best defensive driving vehicle-related deaths occur each year maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front because of alcohol, and thousands of of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. people are injured. ... 148 lust how much alcohol is too much if a person plans to drive? Ideally, no one should drink alcohol and then drive.But if one does, then what’s “too much”?It can be a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here issome general information on the problem. The drinker’s body weight. The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking. 0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. HOURS HOURS According to the American Medical Association, a 180-pound (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wineor three mixed drinksif each had 1- 1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.For example, if the same person drankthree double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a slightlylower BAC level. NUMBER OF DRINKS (as in picture) 1 HOUR 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 BODY WEIGHT IN POUNDS T‘he law in most U.S. states sets the legal alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In Canada the person drinks them. ttle limit is 0.08 percent, and in some But it’s very important to keep in mind 01ther countries it’s lower than that. The I3#ACwill be over 0.10 percent after three that the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research tc) six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as shows that the driving skills of many wre’ve seen, it depends on how much people are impaired at a BAC 149... Your Driving and the Road Drunken Driving (CONT.) approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in an accident increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent (three beers in one hour for a 180-pound or 82 kg person) has doubled his or her chance of having an accident. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of that driver having an accident is six times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chances are twenty-five times greater! And, the body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with a higher BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. ... 150 rhere’s something else about drinking tnd driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in B Yerson’s system can make crash injuries worse. That’s especially true for brain, spinal cord and heart injuries. That means :hat if anyone who has been drinking -jriver or passenger -- is in a crash, the :hance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if that person had not been drinking. And we’ve already seen that the chance of a crash itself is higher for drinking drivers. Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have todo their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Sometimes, as when you’re drivingon snow or ice, it’s easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s perception time.Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction timeis about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only anaverage. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 314 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement orgravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy);tire tread; and the condition of your brakes. Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration fallowed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That .means better braking and longer brake life. Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump Your Pontiac has an advanced electmnic your brakes. If you do,.the pedal may get braking system that will help prevent harder to push down. If your engine stops, skidding. you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. C Your Driving andthe Road Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. (CONT) Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of When you start your vehicle, or when you you. begin to drive away, you may hear a You slam on the brakes. Here’s what momentary motor or clicking noise. And happens with ABS. you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little while this is going on. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is This is the ABS system testing itself. about to stop rolling, the computer will (You may also hear a clicking noise if you separately work the brakes at each front leave the ignition in the “Run” position for about four seconds before starting the wheel and at the rear wheels. vehicle.) If there’s a problem with the The anti-lock system can change the anti-lock brake system, the anti-lock brake pressure Faster than any driver brake system warning light will stay on or could. The computer is programmed to flash. make the most of available tire and road Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. . 152 conditions. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal. If you get too close to the vehicle i n front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakesif that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Your Driving andthe Road To turn the system off, press the button. The light on the button will go off. If the raction control system is limiting wheel ;pin when you press the button, the ;ystem won’t turn off right away. It will rYait until there’s no longer a current need .o limit wheel spin. You can turn the system back on at any :ime by pressing the button again. The ight on the button should come on. Traction Control System (Option: 3800 V6 Engine) (CONI) The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to. (You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.) ... 154 Steering Tips Driving on Curves :t’s important to take curves ata .easonable speed. 9lot of the “driver lost control” accidents nentioned on the news happen on curves. -Iere’s why: Zxperienced driver or beginner, each of 1s is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of Braking in Emergencies it .he tires against the road surface makes Use your anti-lock braking system when Jossible for the vehicleto change its path, you need to. With anti-lock, you can steer when you turn the front wheels.If there’s md brake at the same time. In many IO traction, inertia will keep the vehicle emergencies, steering can help you more going in the same direction.If you’ve than even the very best braking. ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. The traction you can getin a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have traction control and the systemis on, adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places.You can lose control. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll .want to go slower. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are What should youdo if this ever happens? straight ahead. Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the Try to adjust your speed so you can. vehicle the way you want it to go, and “drive” through the curve. Maintain a slow down. reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truc,k stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around the problem. 155... Your Driving and the Road Steering in Emergencies Passing (CONT.) The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Your Pontiac can perform very well in emergencies like these, First apply your brakes. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. ... 156 Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightl: below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to 1/4 turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driverface to face with the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: 0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait fora better time. Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines. If you cansee a sign up ahead that might indicatea turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road aheadis clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line,even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic. Do not gettoo close to thevehcle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’thave adequate spaceif the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keepback a reasonable distance. 0 When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate butstay in the right lane anddon’t get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane.If the way is clear to pass, you will havea “running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.) 0 Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. 0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle,too rapidly. Even though the brake lights are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. 0 If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. Loss of Control Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three‘ control systems (brakes, steering and acceleratiori) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to dowhat the driver has asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. 157... Your Driving and the Road Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down The three types of skids correspond.to on slippery surfaces because stopping your Pontiac’s three control systems.In the distance will be longer and vehicle braking skid your wheels aren’trolling. In control more limited. the steering or cornering slud,too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to While driving on a surface with reduced slip and lose cornering force. And in the traction, try your best to avoid sudden acceleration skid too much throttle causes steering, acceleration, or braking (including engine braking.by shifting to a the driving wheels to spin. lower gear). Any sudden changes could A cornering skid is best handled by cause the tires to slide. You may not easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. realize the surface is slippery until your If you have the traction control system, vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize remember: It helps avoid only the warning clues -- such as enough water, acceleration skid. If you do not have ice or packed snow on the road to make a traction control, or if the system is off, “mirrored surface” -- and slow down then an acceleration skid is also best when you have any doubt. handled by easing your foot off the Remember: Any anti-lock braking system accelerator pedal. (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. ... 158 Driving at Night \Tight driving is more dangerous than day hiving. One reason is that some drivers r e likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or lrugs, with night vision problems, orby atigue. -€ereare some tips on night driving. D Drivedefensively. D Don’t drink and drive. D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlights behind you. ’ 0 Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more spacebetweenyouandothervehicles. 0 Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlights canlight up only so much road ahead. 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. ~ a If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. l You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlights), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching lights. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt Night Vision on the glass. Even the inside of the glass No one can seeas well at night asin the can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty daytime. But as we get older these glass makes lights dazzle and flash more differences increase. A 50-year-old driver than clean glass would, making the pupils may require at least twice as muchlight to of your eyes contract repeatedly. see the same thing at night asa Remember that your headlights light up 20-year-old. far less of a roadway when you are in a What you do in the daytime canalso turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; affect your night vision. For example, if that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly you spend the day in bright sunshine you lighted objects. Just as your headlights are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes should be checked regularly for proper will have less trouble adjusting to night. aim, so should your eyes be examined But if you’re driving, don’t wear regularly. Some drivers suffer from night sunglasses at night. They may cut down blindness -- the inability to see in dim on glare from headlights, but theyalso light -- and aren’t even aware of it. make a lot of things invisible. Driving in the Rain; Rain and wet roads can mean drivfng trouble. On a wet road you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t ‘have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. 159 ... Your Driving and the Road Driving in the Rain (CONE) The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under yourtires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,it has little or no contact with the road. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires haven’t much treador if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning. .. I60 Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when itis raining. Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next section, “Freeway Driving.”) Some Other Rahy Weather Tips Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. 0 Turn on your low-beam headlights -not just your parking lights-- to help make you more visibleto others. 0 Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. Andbe especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: 0 Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and pian your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. 161 ... Your Driving and the Road 1 At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Freeway Driving Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. ... 162 Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. When you want to leave the freeway, nove to the proper lane well in advance. f you miss your exit do not, under any ircumstances, stop and backup. Drive on o the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes pite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your senseof motion. 4fter driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think youare going slower than you actually are. Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you’re ready. Tryto be well Just before you leave the lane, glance rested. If you must start when you’re not quickly over your shoulder to make sure fresh -- such as after a day’s work -there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” don’t plan to make too many miles that spot. first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive Once you are moving on the freeway, in. make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move Is your vehicle ready fora long trip? If slightly slower at night. you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you’ll find experienced andable service experts in Pontiac deaierships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you needit. Here are some things you can check before a trip: Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside? Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? Fuel. Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? Lights: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is itjust plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rushof the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. Keep your eyes moving. Scan theroad ahead and to thesides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently. If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service, or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. Tires: Theyare vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay yourtrip a short time to avoida major storm system? 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? 163... Your Driving and the Road B Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. Hill and Mountain Roads Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down toa lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, andyou can climb the hill better. Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. e Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. .. . 164 0 Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that letyou stay in your own lane. Your Driving and the Road Driving on Snowor Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probablyhave good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get “wet ice” when it’s about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid . 166 lriving on wet ice until salt and sand :rews can getthere. Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road. Nhatever the condition -- smooth ice, lacked, blowing or loose snow -- drive vith caution. Watch for slippery spots.The road might be fine until youhit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appearin shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surfaceof a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actuallyon the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. f you have the traction control system, Leep the system on. It will improve your tbility to accelerate when driving on a ilippery road. Even though your vehicle las a traction control system, you’ll want o slow down and adjust your driving to .he road conditions. See “Traction Control system” in the Index. [f you don’t have the traction control Gystem, accelerate gently. Try not to break :he fragile traction. If you accelerate too Fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish :he surface under the tires even more. Your anti-lock brakes improve your 2bility to make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. If You’re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some thingsto do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengerssafe: Turn on your hazard flashers. Tiea red cloth to your vehicleto alert police that you’ve been stoppedby the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrapa blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlights. Let the heater run for awhile. 167 ... Your Driving and the Road If You’re Caught in a Blizzard (CONX) Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. ... 168 I‘ Towing a Trailer NOTICE: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not coveredby your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section, and see your Pontiac dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. - Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacityis for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability, andfuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this section. In itare many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Manyof these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight.The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do, here are some important points. There are many different laws having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where ,you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2000 pounds (900 kg) or less. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 2000 pounds (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. 0 Then, during the first 500 miles (800km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier .. loads. , Three important considerations have to do with weight: Your Driving andthe Road Weight of the Trailer Tongue p I A 1Weight of the Trailer €low heavy can a trailer safely be? It should never weigh more than 1,400 €Iounds (630 kg) with up to six occupants c)r more than 2,000 pounds(900 kg) with 11p to two occupants unless you have the (>ptionaltrailer-towing package. With the t railer-towing package (available only with the 3800 V6 engine), your vehicle can tow I~pto 2,400 pounds (1 090 kg) with up tlD six occupants or up to 3,000 pounds ( 1 360 kg) with up to two occupants. E3ut even that can betoo heavy. It depends Cm how you plan to use your rig. For e:xample, speed, altitude, road grades, Cmtside temperature and how much your \lehicle is used to pull a trailer are all ... I 70 B important. And, it can also depend on an! special equipment that you have on your vehicle. You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write u at: Customer Assistance Center Pontiac Division One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited, Customer Assistance Center, 1908 Colonel Sam Drive, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7. The tongue load(A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total capacity weight of your vehicle. The capacity weight includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people whowill be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle’’ in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. If you’re using a “dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10% of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a “weight-distributing” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12% of the total loaded trailer weight(B). After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items aroundin the trailer. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for coldtires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification labelat the rear edge of the driver’s door Certificationnire label at the edgeof the driver’s door orsee “Tire Loading” inthe Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle. Hitches It’s important to have thecorrect hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch, Here are some rules to follow: If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 2,000 pounds (900 kg), be sure to use a 0 The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to thebumper. Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the properly mounted, weight-distributing safety chains under the tongue of the hitch and sway control of the proper trailer so that the tongue will not drop to size. Thisequipment is very important the road if it becomes separated from the for proper vehicle loading and good hitch. Instructions about safety chains handling when you.’re driving, may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer Will you have to make any holes in manufacturer. Follow the manufact6,rer’s the body of your vehicle when you recommendation for attaching safety install a trailerhitch? If you do, then chains. Always leave just enough dack so be sure to seal the holes later when you can turn with your rig. And, never you remove the hitch. If you don’t allow safety chains to dragon the ground. seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too. 171 ... Your Driving and the Road Trailer Brakes [f your trailer weighs more than 1,000 pounds (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. :ontroller by hand to be sure the brakes ire working. This lets you check your Aectrical connection at the same time. NOTE: Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all. Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform, safety chains, electrical connector, lights, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake ... 172 During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the loadis secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working. Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. 1 Passing You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towinga trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyondthe passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane. Backing Up Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move thetrailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Making Turns Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lights will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hotand no longer work well. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance. 173... Your Driving andthe Road Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into “P” (Park) yet. When You Are Ready to Leave After Parkingon a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: 0 Start your engine; 0 Shift into a gear; and Release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to “ P ’ (Park). 5. Release the regular brakes. 174 of the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, belts, cooling system, and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Part 5 Problems on the Road H e r e you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road. HazardWarningFlashers ............................................ Jumpstarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TowingYourPontiac ............................................... EngineOverheating ................................................ If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ChangingaFlatTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compactspare .................................................... If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow ............................ 176 177 181 186 193 193 202 202 175 c ... Problems on the Road Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lights will flash on and off. But they won’t flash if you‘re braking. . . . 176 Your hazard warning flashers switch is 01n 1:o turn off the flashers, pull out on the C:ollar. When the hazard warning flashers the steering column, below the ignition a.re on, your turn signals won’t work. switch. Press the button in to make your front and rear turn signal lights flash on I Other Warning Devices and off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in. If you carry reflective triangles, you can S,et one up at the side of the road about )OO feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. c Jump Starting If your battery has run down,you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your Pontiac. But please follow the steps below to doit safely. On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding door,a low voltage battery may cause the systemto become inoperative. Referto “Power Sliding Door” in the Index for more information. NOTICE: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your Pontiac by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle. I To Jump Start Your Pontiac: . Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. ..> NOTICE: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. 1 C Problems on the Road To Jump Start Your Pontiac: (CONTI 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your Pontiac, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. You could be injured if the vehicles roll. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Make sure the vehicles are in “P’ (Park), or “N” (Neutral) if equipped with manual transmission. . . e 178 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all lights that aren’t needed, and radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save your radio! NOTICE: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. 5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too. Your Pontiac has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal. The terminal is in the red box on the same sideof the engine compartment as your battery. You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on your battery. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know: Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect (+) to (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. To open the remote positive (+) terminal box, pull the tab and open the cover. 179.. . Problems on the Road To Jump Start Your Pontiac: (CONT.) 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Usea remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) terminal. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part onthe engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. ... 180 3. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connectionis just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 10.Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run the engine fora while. 11.Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won't startafter a few tries, it probably needs service. B C DEAD BATTERY 12.Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don't touch each other or an! other metal. I Towing Your Pontiac 'ry to have a GM dealer or a professional )wing service tow your Pontiac. The sua1 towing equipment is: L A) Sling-type tow truck B) Wheel-lift tow truck C) Car carrier. F your vehicle has been changed or Iodified since it was factory-new by dding aftermarket items like fog lamps, ero skirting, or special tires and wheels, lese instructions and illustrations may ot be correct. lefore you do anything, turn on the azard warning flashers. 181 ... Problems on the Road Towing Your Pontiac (CONK) When you call, tell the towing service: That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front with sling-type equipment. 0 That your vehicle has front-wheel drive. 0 The make, model, and year of your vehicle. 0 Whether you can still move the shift lever. 0 If there was an accident, what was damaged. When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know that this manual contains detailed towing instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to see them. ... 182 When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key off. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transaxle should be in Neutral and the parking brake released. Don’t have your vehicle towed on the front wheels, unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the front wheels, don’t go more than 35 mph (55 km/h) or farther than 50 miles (80 km) or your transaxle will be damaged. If these limits must be exceeded, then the front wheels have to be supported on a dolly. NOTICE: Towing from the Front-Vehicle Hook-up Before hooking up to a tow truck, be sure to read all the information on “Towing Your Pontiac” earlier in this section. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift .’ equipment. To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise vehicle until adequate clearance i s obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment. Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to suspension componeqts when using car carrier equipment, Always use T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. - NOTICE: Do not tow with sling-type equipment or fascia/fog light damage will occur. Use wheel-lift or car carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car carrier equipment. 183. .. Problems on the Road A I I I Towing from the Front-Vehicle Hook-up , . (CON?) 1. Attach T-hook chains on both sides in the slotted holes in the bottom of the frame rails, about 2 feet behind the front wheels. 2. Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of each lower control arm. Towing from the 9ear-Vehicle Hook-up 5efore hooking up to a tow truck, be sure 3 read all the information on "Towing lour Pontiac" earlier in this section. 1 Attach T-hook chains on both sides in the slotted holesin the frame railsjust ahead of the rear wheels. , - , , $' j . NOTICE' ~ 8 Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can oGcur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift :. equipment. To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment. Do not attach Winch cables or J-hooks to suspension componehts when using car carrier equipme& Always use T-hooks inserted in @e T-hook slots. ', 2. Position the lower sling crossbar directly underthe rear bumper. No 4x4 wood beam is needed. 3. Attach a separate safety chain around the end of each .axle inboard of the spring. 4. Be certain your vehicle is towed no fasteT than 35 mph (55 km/h) and no farther than 50 miles (80 km) to avoid damage to your transaxle. , I) ... 185 ... Problems on the Road Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage an your Pontiac’s instrument panel. See “Coolant Temperature Gage” in the [ndex. If Sfeam /s Coming From Your Engine -..I86 NOTICE: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally. If you get the overheat warningbut see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get If the warning continues, pull over, stop, a little too hot when you: and park your vehicle right away. 0 Climb a long hill on a hot day. If there’s still no signof steam, you can idle the engine for two or three minutes 0 Stop after high speed driving. while you’re parked, to see if the warning Idle for long periods in traffic. stops. But then, if you still have the warning, TURN OFF THE ENGINE Tow a trailer. AND GET EVERYONE OUT OF THE If you get the overheat warning withno VEHICLE until it cools down. sign of steam, try this fora minute or so: You may decide not to lift the hood but to 1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it get service help right away. Cooling System When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:’ (A) Coolant recovery tank (B) Radiator pressure cap (c) Electric engine fan, or fans if you have the 3800 V6 engine. C Off. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary. 3. Try to keep your engine under load [f the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down. (in a drive gear where the engine runs slower). 187 ... Problems on the Road The coolant level should beat or above :he“FULL HOT” mark. If it isn’t, you nay have a leak in the radiator hoses, leater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. Cooling System (CONT.) I I NOTICE: I Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. If there seems to be no leak, check to see if the electric enginefan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it isn’t, your vehicle needs service. How to Add Coolant tothe Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at or abovethe “FULL HOT” mark, mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and a proper antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mix.) E NOTICE: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant. vVhen the coolant in the coolant recovery tim n k is at or above the “FULL HOT” ITlark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s 0: ne more thing you can try.You can add tf le proper coolant mix directly to the rzldiator but be sure the cooling system is C(301 before you do it. 189 ... Problems on the Road Uow to Add Coolant to the Radiator I. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly to the left until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap). ... 190 If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. 3I. Fill the radiator with the proper mix, A hiss means there is still some up to thebase of the filler neck. pressure left. 1. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the “FULL HOT” mark. 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 191 ... Problems on the Road 7. By this time the coolantlevel inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mix through thefiller neck until the level reaches the baseof the filler neck. 5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off. ... 192 6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose gettinlr hot. Watch out for the engine fan(s). Y If a Tire Goes Flat It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out ofa tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: Air Influtor Your vehicle may have an air inflator for use in bringihg tires up to the proper pressure. To learn about it, see “Air Inflator System” in the Index. If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very 8. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. the arrows on the pressure capline up Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if like this. possible. If a tire goes flat, the next section shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. 193... Problems on the Road Changing a Flat Tire (CONK) The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and changea tire. The equipment you'll need is in the storage compartment at the rear of the vehicle. ... 194 1. Open the jack storage compartment by sliding the latch down and removing the compartment cover. 2. Remove the jack and jacking tools by loosening the wing nut and retainer bar. '. The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, behind the rear bumper. Insert the narrow end of the shaft into the hole above the rear bumper. Then attach the folding wrench to the shaft. 3. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and remove the jacking tools (folding wrench and shaft) from the pouch. . 6. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the spare, then place'ihe compact spare tire near the flat:tire. Rotate the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower the compact spare tire until it can be pulled from under the vehicle. 195... Problems on the Road Changing a Flat Tire (CONT.) 7. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, each wheel nut is covered with a nylon cap. Use the folding wrench to remove the nylon caps from the whee nuts before you loosen the nuts. If your vehicle has the plastic “bolt-on’’ wheel covers, you cannot separate the nylon wheel nut caps from the cover. Loosen them completely using the folding wrench, and remove the wheel cover. If the wheel nut caps have been completely loosened, the wheel cover will come off easily. ... 196 8. If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, each wheel has one wheel locknut in place of a standard wheel nut. A special wheel lock key (removal tool) and instructions are stored in your glove box. Attach the wheel lock key to the socket of the folding wrench. Remove the locking wheel nut by turning counterclockwise. If your vehicle has the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, you will not have a locking wheel nut. 9. Loosen the wheel nuts-but do not remove them-using the folding wrench. 1O.Attach the folding wrench tothe jack, and rotate the wrench clockwiseto rais'e thejack head a few inches. 1. Near each wheel, there is a notch in the vehicle's frame. Position the jack and raise the jack head until itfits firmly into the notch in the vehicle's frame nearest the flat tire. Do not raist the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire near you. C 197... Problems on the Road I3.Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. Changing a Flat Tire (CONI) NOTICE: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack.Be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising your vehicle. . b. 198 12.Raise the vehicle by rotating the folding wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit. 14.Remove any corrosion or dirt from the 15.Replace the wheel nuts with the wheel bolts, mounting surfacesor rounded end of the nuts toward the spare wheel. Place the spare on the wheel. Tighten each .nut by hand until wheel mounting surface. the wheel is held against the hub. 16.Lower thevehicle by attaching the folding wheel wrench to the jabk and rotating the wrench counterclockwise. .., Lower the jack completely. C 199... Problems on the Road NOTICE: Wheel covers won’tfit on your compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare. ‘topsomewhere as soon as you can and ave the nuts tightened with a torque rrench. The torque setting should be100 ound-feet (140 Nom). Changing a Flat Tire (CONI) 17.Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-cross sequence, as shown. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. I . 200 18.Lay the flat tire near the rearof the vehicle with the valve stem down. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and raise theflat tire until you hear the hoist mechanism click twice. This means the wheel is firmly stored against the underside of the vehicle. When storing the spare tire,be certain to turn the spare so the valve stem is near the rear of the vehicle. This will help you to check and maintaintire 19.Replace all jacking tools as they were pressure in the spare. stored in the jack storage compartment and replace the compartment cover. Push against the tire to be certainit is stored firmly. Unless you have the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers, be sure to also store the nylon nut caps. When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, replace the bolt-on wheel covers or the nylon nut caps. Tighten them “hand tight” over the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench (see step 7). 201 ... Problems on the Road Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made toperform well at posted speed limits for distances up to 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again. NOTICE: Don’t take your compact spare through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails.That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle. Dlon’t use your compact spare on some other vehicle. And don’t mix your compact spare or W heel with other wheels or tires. They W on’t fit. Keep your spare and its wheel tolgether. NOTICE: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them will damage your vehicle and destroy the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare. . e . 202 I If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow Vhat you don’t want to do when your rehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels. ?he method known as “rocking’’ can help ~ O Uget out when you’re stuck, but you nust use caution. NOTICE: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle aswell as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting yourtransaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. Rocking your vehicle to get it out: First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn your traction control system off. (See “Traction Control System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between “R” (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries,you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Pontiac” in the Index. Notes 204 Part 6 Service & Appearance Care . . . . . 206 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Transaxle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H e r e you will find information about . . . . . . 221 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..... the care of your Pontiac. This part Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 begins with service and fuel information. and then it shows how to Brake Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 check importantfluid and lubricant Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 levels. There is also technical . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Headlight Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . information about your vehicle.and a Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 section devotedto its appearance Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . . . . . . . . . . . 228 care. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Appearance Care Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . ...................... 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Add-on Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Fuses & Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . ....................... 251 ReplacementBulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 ... Service & Appearance Care Doing Your Own Service Work [f you want to do some of your own jervice work, you’ll want to get the ,roper Pontiac Service Manual. It tells you much more about how to service your Pontiac than this manual can, To order the proper service manual, see “Service Publications” in the Index. I Service four Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle )est and wants you to be happy with it. Ne hope you’ll go to your dealer for all lour service needs. You’ll get genuine 3M parts and GM-trained and supported ;ervice people. Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac” in the Index. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM dehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have me of these marks. NOTICE: If you try to do your own service work without knowing enough about it, your vehicle could be damaged. ...206 Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine. Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher. It should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the U.S. and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada. These fuels should have the proper additives,so you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In the U.S. and Canada, it’s easy to be sure you get the right kindof gasoline (unleaded). You’ll see “UNLEADED” right on the pump. And only unleaded nozzles will fit into your vehicle’s filler neck. If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But.don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem. What about gasoline with blending materials that contain oxygen [oxygenates), such as MTBE or alcohol? NOTICE: Fuel that is more than 5% methanol is bad for your vehicle. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. And even at 5% or less, there must be “cosolvents” and corrosion preventers in this fuel to help avoid these problems. Fuel Capacity: 20 U.S. Gallons (76L). Use unleaded fuel only. MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.” Fuel that is no more than 15% MTBE is Fine for your vehicle. Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol. Properly-blended fuel that is no more than 10% ethanol is fine for your vehicle. Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol. 207.. . Service & Appearance Care Gasolines for CleanerAir Fuels in Foreign Countries Your use of gasoline with deposit control additives will help prevent deposits from forming i n your engine and fuel system. That helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly. It’s good for your vehicle, and you’ll be doing your part for cleaner air. [f you plan on driving in another country outside the U.S. or Canada, unleaded fuel may be hard to find. Do not use leaded gasoline. If you use even one tankful, your emission controls won’t work well or at all. With continuous use, spark plugs can get fouled, the exhaust system can Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates. General Motors recommends corrode, and your engine oil can that you use gasolines with these blending deteriorate quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen materials, such as MTBE and ethanol. By sensor will be damaged. All of that means costly repairs that wouldn’t be covered by doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts of the country your warranty. that have high carbon monoxide levels. To check on fuel availability, ask an auto In addition, some gasoline suppliers are club, or contact a major oil company that now producing reformulated gasolines. does business in the country where you’ll These gasolines are specially designed to be driving. reduce vehicle emissions. General Motors You can also write us at the following recommends that you use reformulated address for advice. Just tell us where gasoline. By doing so, you can help clean you’re going and give your Vehicle the air, especially in those parts of the identification Number (VIN). country that have high ozone levels. General Motors Overseas Distribution You should ask your service station Corporation, operators if their gasolines contain deposit North American Export Sales (NAES) control additives and oxygenates, and if 1908 Colonel Sam Drive they have been reformulated to reduce Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7 vehicle emissions. . 208 I Filling Your Tank :he cap is behind a hinged door on the eft side of your vehicle. You will notice hat on the inside of the hinged door there s a place to hold the gas cap while you re adding fuel. 3e careful not to spill gasoline. Clean 5asoline from painted surfaces as soon as Iossible. See “Cleaning the Outside of four Pontiac” in the Index. Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Pontiac” in the Index. When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until you hear a clicking noise. NOTICE: To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper venting, and yourfuel tank and emissions system might bedamaged. Checking Things Under the Hood Hood Release C To open the hood, first pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the underhood release. Lift the hood. 209.. . Service & Appearance Care Checking Things Under the Hood (CONK) The hood prop may be hotdue to increased engine temperatures under the good, so be careful when handling it. Use your good prop sleeve when handling the good prop. Pull forward on the hood propto release it from its storage clip. Then put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the underside of the hood. 8 210 Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Thenlift the hood to relieve the pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the propto its retainer. Then just let the hood down and close it firmly. Engine Oil It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. Turn off the engineand give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, theoil dipstick might not show the actual level. Underhood Light (oPTIcTN) Your underhood light will go on when you open the hood. To Check Engine Oil 3.1L V6: Checking Engine Oil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip lower, and check the level. C 3800 V6: Checking Engine Oil 211 0 . . Service & Appearance Care W e n to Add Oil the oil is at or below the ADD mark, len you’ll need to add some oil. But you lust use the right kind. This section tplains what kind of oil to use. For rankcase capacity, see “Capacities and pecifications” in the Index. NOTICE: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. L1L V6: Adding Engine Oil 3eginning midyear 1993, oils of the roper quality for your vehicle will be dentified with this new “starburst” ymbol. The “starburst” symbol indicates hat the oil has been certifiedby the imerican Petroleum Institute (API), and s suitable for usein your gasoline engine ust fill it enough toput the level xnewhere in the proper operating range. ush the dipstick all the way back in [hen you’re through. r‘ou should look for thison the front of he oil container, and use& oils that lisplay this new symbol. 3800 V6: Adding Engine Oil 212 What Kind of Oil to Use r‘ou should also use the proper viscosity )il for your vehicle,as shown in the ollowing chart: Recommended SAE Viscosity Grade Engine Oils For best fuel economy andcold starting, select the lowest SAE viscosity grade oil for the expected temperature range. HOT HWTHER \ ;AE5W-30 (3.1L V6 Engine) IAE 1OW-30 (3800 V6 Engine) shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is bes; jr your vehicle. However, you can use AE 1OW-30 if it's going to be 0°F - 18"C) or above. These numbers on an il container show its viscosity, or lickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, uch as SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50. is shown in the chart, SAE 1OW-30 is est for your vehicle. However, you can se SAE 5W-30 if it's going to be'colder Ian 60°F ( 16°C) before your next oil hange. When it's very cold, you should se SAE 5W-30. These numbers dn an oil ontainer show its viscosity, or thickness. 10 not use other viscosity oils, such as AE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50. LS COLD WEATHER IF NEITHER SAE5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30 GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30 GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES PBOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C). DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR MOTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED. F you cannot find oils with the new starburst" symbol on the front of the ontainer, you should look for and use ils containing the following three things: 213... Service & Appearance Care Recommended SAE Viscosity Grade Engine Oils For best fuel economy and cold starting, select the lowest SAE viscosity grade oil for the expected temperature range; What Kind of Oil to Use (CONT) 0 “SG” or “SH” must be on the oil container, either by itself or combined with other quality designations, such a 6 “SH/CD,” “SH,SG,CD,” or “SG/CD” etc. These letters show American Petroleum Institute (API) levels of quality. LOOK FOR ONELABELS OF THESE &souN# HOT WEATHER LYI)IYCC 0 - SAE 5W-30 SAE 1OW-30 PREFERRED (-18”’) COLD WEATHER IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30 GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30 GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C). DO NOT USE SAE IOW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANOTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED. If you use oils thatdo not have either the “starburst” symbol or an API SH designation, you can cause engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench@ oil(in Canada, GM Engine Oil) meets all the requirements for your vehicle. SAE 1OW-30 (3800 V6 Engine) SAE 5W-30 (3.1L V6 Engine) 0 - SGor SH NOTICE: Engine Oil Additives Don’t add anything to your oil. Your Pontiac dealer is readyto advise if you Oils with these words on the container think something should be added. will help you save fuel. Energy Conserving I1 These three things are usually included in a doughnut shaped logo (symbol) on most containers. If you cannot find oils with the “starburst” symbol, you should look for oils with the doughnut shaped symbol, containing the three things noted above. When to Change Engine Oil Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) See if any one of these is true for you: An engine coolant heater can be a big help if you have to park outside in very cold weather, 0°F (- 18 “C) or colder. If your vehicle has this option, see “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index. Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km). 0 It’s below freezing outside and most trips are less than 10 miles (16 km). I Air Cleaner Lefer to the Maintenance Schedule to etermine when to replace the air filter. lee“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in le Index. What to Do with Used Oil The engine is at low speed mostof the Did youknow that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthyfor time (as in door-to-door delivery, or your skin and could even cause cancer? in stop-and-go traffic). Don’t let used oilstay on your skinfor very Youtow a trailer often. long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor Most trips are through dusty places. properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you needto change your oil manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever comes first. Used oil can be a real threat to the (See “Change Oil Indicator”in the Index.) environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil fromthe If none of them is true, change the oil filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever comes first. Change oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or the filter at the first oil change andat bodies of water.Instead, recycle it by taking every other oil change after that. It it to a place that collects used oil. If you (See “Change Oil Indicator” in the Index.) have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. 0 C NOTICE: If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. Service & Appearance Care 3.1L V6: Checking Air Cleaner Filter Air Cleaner (CONK) To Check or Replace: 1. Remove the large wing nut and lift the cover. . ..216 3.1L V6: Replacing Air Cleaner Filter 3800 V6: Checking Air Cleaner Filter 2. Remove the air cleaner filter. To Check or Replace: 3. Be sure to install the air cleaner filter, 1. Loosen the four wing nuts. replace the cover and tighten the wing nut securely. Automatic Transaxle Fluid NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid. When to Cheekand Change 3800 V6: Replacing Air Cleaner Filter A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to change your fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. 2. Pull the top of the air cleaner toward How to Check the front of the vehicle and removethe Because this operation can be a little air cleaner filter. difficult, you may choose to have this 3. Be sure to install the air cleaner filter, done at a Pontiac dealership Service replace the cover and tighten the wing Department. nuts securely. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. ~~ Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving: 0 When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). 0 At high speed for quite a while. 0 In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. 0 While pulling a trailer. 217... Service & Appearance Care How to Check (CONT.) To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F ( 1OOC), you may have to drive longer. To check the fluid level 1. Park your vehicle on a level place. 3.lL V6: Checking Automatic Transaxle Fluid 3.1L V6: Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid 2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in “P” (Park). 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in “P” (Park). 4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. Then. without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: . .218 3800 V6: Checking Automatic Transaxle Fluid 3800 V6: Adding Automatic Transaxle Fluid Pull out the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level& doesn’t take much 1. Push it back inall the way, wait three fluid, generally less than a pint (0.5L). seconds and then pullit back out Don’t overfill. We recommend ou again. use only fluid labeled DEXRON& -111 or DEXRON@-IIE,because fluids 2. Check both sides of the dipstick, and with that label are made especially for read the lower level.The fluid level your automatic transaxle. Damage must be in the cross-hatchedarea. caused by fluid other than 3. If the fluid level is in the acceptable DEXRON@-111 or DEXRON@-IIEis range, push the dipstick back inall the not covered by your newvehicle way. warranty. How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxlefluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bring the levelinto the cross-hatched area on thedipstick. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.” When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way. Engine Coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. The proper coolant for your Pontiac will: 0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). 9 Give boiling protection up to 262°F (128°C). 9 Protect against rust and corrosion. 9 Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning lights work as they should. 1. Pull out the dipstick. 219... Service & Appearance Care Engine Coolant (CONE) NOTICE: What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled)and one-half antifreeze that meets “GM Specification 1825-M,” which won’t damage aluminum parts. You can also use a recycled coolant conforming to GM Specification 1825-M with a complete coolant flush and refill. If you use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else. If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mix can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Adding Coolant 3.1L V6: Checking Coolant To Check Coolant When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at “COLD’ or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be up to “FULL HOT,” or a little higher. 3800 V6: Checking Coolant To Add Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the coolant recovery tank. Radiator Pressure Cap NOTICE: Your radiator cap is a 15 psi ( 105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must bc; tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck. When you replace your radiator pressure cap, an AC’ cap is recommended. Power Steering Fluid How To Check Power Steering Fluid Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the “HOT” mark. When the engine compartment is cool, the level should be at the “FULL COLD’’ mark. Thermostat Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but 5e careful not to spill it. Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of soolant through the radiator until the soolant reaches a preset temperature. When you replace your thermostat, an 4C’ thermostat is recommended. 221 ... Service & Appearance Care What to Add iefer tothe Maintenance Schedule to letermine what kind of fluid to use. See ‘Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” i :he Index. NOTICE: 3.1L V6: Checking Power Steering Fluid When adding power steering fluid or making a complete fluid change, always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper flEid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid To Add Open the cap labeled “WASHER FLUID ONLY.” Add washer fluid until the bottle is full. 3800 V6: Checking Power Steering Fluid How To Check Power Steering Fluid(CONK) pF-0 0 When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion, which could damage the tankif it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Brake Master Cylinder Your brake master cylinder is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in your master cylinder might go down. The first is that the brakefluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The otherreason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid When your brake fluid falls to a low level, lour brake warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the hdex. What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 (GM Part No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed zontainer only, and always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap before removing it. @ 223 . Service & Appearance Care Brake Master Cylinder Brake Wear (CONT.) Your Pontiac has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes. NOTICE: DOT-5 silicone brake fluid can damage your vehicle. Don’t use it. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Brake fluid can damage paint, so be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index. .. 224 Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or beheard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake peda11 firmly). NOTICE: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakesare first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever heara rear brake rubbing noise,have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When youhave the front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. Brake Pedal Travel Replacing Brake System Parts See your dealerif the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height, or if there is a The braking system on a modern vehicle rapid increase in pedal travel. This could is complex. Its many parts have to be of be a sign of brake trouble. top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Brake Adjustment Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake parts in them, as Every time you apply the brakes your Pontiac does when it is new. When moderately, with or without the vehicle you replace parts of your braking system moving, your brakes adjust for wear. -- for example, when your brake linings [f your brake pedal goes down farther wear down and you have to have new :han normal, your rear drum brakes may ones put in -- be sure you get new 1eed adjustment. Adjust themby backing genuine GM replacement parts. If you ~pand firmly applying the brakesa few don’t, your brakes may no longer work cimes. properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change, for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Battery Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom@ battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time for a new battery. we recommend a Delco Freedom @ battery. Get one that has the catalog number shown on the original battery’s label. - ‘ - On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding door, a low voltage battery or replacing the battery may cause the system to become inoperative. Refer to “Power Sliding Door” in the Index for more information. 225 .. Service & Appearance Care Vehicle Storage Halogen Bulbs [f you’re not going to drive your vehicle For 25 days or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery.This will help keep your battery fromrunning down. Headlight Bulb Replacement For the type of bulb, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Jump Starting For jump starting instructions, see “Jump Starting” in the Index. . .. f f 6 1. Remove the two black knobs. 2. Tilt the bulb housing forward. 3. Twist the L-shaped bulb assembly counterclockwise 116 turn until the flanges align with the slots in the retainer ring. 4. Pull out the bulb assembly. 5. Disconnect the bulb wiring harness from the bulb assembly by lifting the plastic locking tab. 6. Snap a new bulb assembly onto the wiring harness. 7. Replace the bulb assembly by reversing step 3. 8. Replace the bulb housing and the two black knobs. Taillight Bulb Replacement 1 For the type of bulb, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. 1. Open the rear side windows and liftgate. 2. Remove the two screws from the taillight housing. 3. Undo the spring clips under the weatherstrip at the rear of the side window. 4. Pull off the entire taillight houking. 5. Pinch the lever and twist the bulb assembly 1/6 turn counterclockwise to remove. 6. Remove the bulb by pressing in and turning 1/8 turn counterclockwise. 7. Line up the small retainer bumps on the replacement bulb so that the lower bump slides into the deepest slot in the housing. Press in and twist the bulb 1/8 turn clockwise. Reposition the bulb assembly in the taillight housing. Turn the assembly 1/6 turn clockwise to lock in place. 227 .. Service & Appearance Care ~ I MFD BY GENERALMOTORSCORPM1Y3 CAWR FRT OAWR RR LB/KC THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE US.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETYSTANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWNABOVE. NUMBER SERlAL M.P.V. MODEL SPEED TIRESIZE RTC RIM PSVI(PA (COLD1 MPBY ~ ~~ , SPA SEEOWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Taillight Bulb Replacement (CONT.) Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 3. Replace the entire taillight housing Replacement blades for your vehicle are 24 inches in length. They come in different types and are removed in different ways. Here's-how to remove the type with a release clip: and screws. 3. Attach the spring clips to the taillight housing and secure them. I 0.Close the rear side windows and liftgate. 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield. 11. Test the bulbs byusing your turn signals andtaillights. 2. Lift the release clip with a screwdriver and pull the blade assembly off the wiper arm. 3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm. s .220 Loading Your Vehicle 'he CertificationRire label is found on he rear edge of the driver's door. The abel shows the size of your original tires .nd the inflation pressures needed to bbtain the gross weight capacityof your rehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Jehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR ncludes the weightof the vehicle, all mupants, fuel and cargo. The Certificationnire label also tells you he maximum weights for the front and 'ear axles, called Gross Axle.Weight cating (GAWR). To find out the actual oads on your front and rear axles, you leed to go to a weigh station and weigh lour vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Electronic Level Control On vehicles equipped with optional electronic level control, the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept levelas you load or unload your vehicle. For more about this option, see “Electronic Level Control” in the Index. Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way. NOTICE: Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading. 229. .- Service & Appearance Care Tires We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by leading tire manufacturers. These tires are warranted by the tire manufacturers and their warranties are delivered with every new Pontiac. If your spare tire is a different brand than your road tires, you will have a tire warranty folder from each of these manufacturers. /I qflation - Tire Pressure TIhe CertificationEire label which is on thle rear edge of the driver’s door shows thLe correct inflation pressuresfor your tilres, when they’re cold. “Cold” means Y‘3ur vehicle has been sitting forat least a mile thtree hours or driven no more than I NOTICE: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation overinflation is all right. It’s not.If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation) you can get: Toomuchflexing Too muchheat Tireoverloading 0 Badwear 0 Bad handling 0 Bad fueleconomy. NOTICE: (Continued) I NOTICE:(Continued) If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you canget: 0 Unusualwear 0 Bad handling Roughride 0 Needlessdamagefromroad hazards. When to Check Check your tires once a monthor more. Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. Simply looking a t the tires will not tell you the pressure. especially if you have radial tires -which may look properly inflated even if they’re underinflated. If your tires have valve caps, be sure to put them back on. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. \ / Tire Inspectionand Rotation To make your tires last longer, have them inspected and rotated at the mileages recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. Use this rotation pattern. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Certification/Tire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. 231 ... Service & Appearance Care You need a new tire if Tire Inspection and Potation (CONT.) When It’s Time for New Tires )ne way to tell when it’s time for new ires is to check the treadwear indicators, vhich will appear when your tires have mly 2/32 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread emaining. ...232 You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. To find out what kind and sizeof tires you leed, look at the Certification/Tire label. You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each :ire’s sidewall. Whenyou get new tires, get ones with that sameTPC Spec number. That way, your vehicle will zontinue to have tires thatare designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by a “MS” (for mud and snow). The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Buying New Tires 0 The tire has a bump, bulge or split. 0 The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial)as your original tires. Uniform Tire Qua/ity Grading The following information relatesto the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) - Treadwear Temperature A, B, C The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. - Traction A, B,C The traction grades, from highest to lowest are: A, B, and C. They represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger car tires. 233 . .. Service & Appearance Care - Temperature A, B, C (CONT.) Wheel Replacement While the tires available as standard or optional equipment on General Motors vehicles may vary with respect to these grades, all such tires meet General Motors performance standards and have been approved for use on General Motors vehicles. All passenger type (P Metric) tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum ,wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your Pontiac dealer if any of these conditions exist. Wheel Alignment and Balance Your dealer will know the kind of wheel Tire you need. The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. 234 Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your Pontiac Model. NOTICE: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. ked Replacement Wheels Tire Chains NOTICE: Use tire chains only where legaland only when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains thatare the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down untilit stops. Driving too fast with chains onwill damage your vehicle. Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your Pontiac, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructidns. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. See “Appearance Care Chart” in the Index for recommended products. Never use these to clean your vehicle: 0 Gasoline 0 Benzene 0 Naphtha 0 CarbonTetrachloride 0 Acetone 0 Paint Thinner 0 Turpentine 0 Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. 235.. . Service & Appearance Care up stains as soon as you can -Appearance Care (CONI) D Clean before they set. NOTICE: Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Laundry Soap Bleach ReducingAgents Alcohol Cleaning the Insideof Your Pontiac Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often.A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric 236 As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds. Rinse the section witha clean, wet sponge. Wipe off what’s left witha slightly damp paper towel or cloth. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer or a heat’ lamp. NOTICE: Be careful with a hair dryer or heat lamp. You could scorch the fabric. a Vacuum and brush the’area to remove any loose dirt. a Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. Your Pontiac dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a foam-type a Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner powdered cleaner. They will clean normal following the directions on the spots and stains very well. Do not use container label. them on vinyl or leather. a Use suds only and apply witha clean Here are some cleaning tips: sponge. Always read the instructions on the a Don’t saturate the material. cleaner label. . Don’t rub it roughly. Wipe with a clean cloth. Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric First,see if youhavetousesolvent-type cleaner at all. Some spots stains and will clean off better with just water and mild soap. If you need to usea solvent: Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material witha clean, dull knife or scraper. Use very little cleaner, lighl pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning shouldstart at the outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep changingto a clean section of the cloth. 0 When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with anair hose, hair dryer, or heat lamp to help prevent a cleaning ring. (See the previous NOTICE.) Special Cleaning Problems because the cleaner will dissolve them and may cause them to spread. Non-Greasy Stains Cleaning Vinyl Such as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood. Use warm water and a clean cloth. e Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. 0 If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. e If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterbaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Greasy or Oily Stains Such as grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt. 0 If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 0 0 Followthesolvent-typeinstructions described earlier. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful, If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner. Combination Stains Such as candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, :hili sauce and unknown stains. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with cool water and allow to dry. 0 Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once. Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a solvent-type vinyl cleaner. Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and I mild soap or saddle soap. For stubborn stains, use a mild solution of 10% isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) and 90% water. Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather. Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into finish, it can harm the leather. 237.. . Service & Appearance Care Cleaning the Top of the Care of Safety Belts lnstrurnent Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. Cleaning the Built-In Child Restraint Pad The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the seat frame with fastener strips. You can remove the pad and hand wash it with mild soap and water. . .238 Keep belts clean and dry. Glass 3ass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Zleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleanerwill remove normal tobacco smoke and dust Films. Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scrapedoff later. If abrasive cleanersare used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield, Backglass and Wiper Blades Cleaning the Outsideof Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of Your Pontiac The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper Washing Your Vehicle blade chatters when running, waxor other The best way to preserve your vehicle’s material may be on the blade or finish is to keep it clean by washing it windshield. often with lukewarm or cold water. Clean the outside of the windshield with Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011). The chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish windshield is clean if beads do not form or car washing (mild detergent) soaps. when you rinse it with water. Don’t use cleaning agents that contain Clean the blade by wiping vigorously acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents with a cloth soaked in full strength should be flushed promptly and not windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the allowed to dry on the surface, or they blade with water. could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or a 100% cotton towel to Wiper blades should be checked on a avoid surface scratches and water regular basis and replaced when worn. spotting. your Pontiac may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Your Pontiac has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. NOTICE: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. High pressure truck washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. 239.. . Service & Appearance Care II Tires Aluminum Wheels Your Pontiac dealer has a GM White (If So Equipped) Sidewall Tire Cleaner. You can use a stiff 1m s h with the cleaner. Your aluminum wheels have a protective coating similar to the painted surface of your Pontiac. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, chrome polish, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage this coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax may be applied. When applying a tire dressing, always care to wipe off any over spray or !splash from painted surfaces. Petroleom1based products may damage the paint 1finish. 1 1rake Weatherstrips I NOTICE: If you have aluminum wheels, don’t use an automatic vehicle wash that has hard silicon carbide cleaning brushes. These brushes can take off the protective coating. L ...240 Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids & Lubricants” in the Index.) Foreign Material Calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, and other foreign matter can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Use cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials akailable from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. rn Underbody Maintenance rn Collision rcepair Your vehicle was built with composite SMC (Sheet Molded Compound) Chemicals used for ice and snow removal fiberglass body panels and molded RIM and dust control cancollect on the (Reaction Injection Molded) front fenders underbody. If these are not removed, and bumper covers. These panels require accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on different collision repair procedures than the underbody parts such as fuellines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even metal-paneled vehicles. See your Pontiac dealer for information on collision repair. though they have corrosion protection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you. Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Pontiac will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. 241 ... Service & Appearance Care Appearance Care and Maintenance Materials You can get these from your Pontiac dealer. Stops squeaks 1052349 I2 oz. (0.340kg) Lubriplate (White Grease) For hood, trunk, door hinges and latches 1051055 16 oz. (0.473L) Preservatone Vinyl Top Dressing IO5 I398* 8 oz. (0.237L) Spot Lifter For cloth 1051515 32 oz. (0.946L) Washer Solvent Windshield-washing system 1052870 16 oz. (0.473L) Wash-Wax (conc.) * Not recommendedfor pigskin suede leather. See Your General Motors Dealersfor These Products. See Your Maintenance Schedule for Other Products. Exterior Wash Add-on Electrical Equipment NOTICE: I Vehicle IdentiJication Number (VIN) Service Parts Identification Label rhis is the legal identifier for your You’ll find this label inside the glove box door. It’s very helpfulif you ever need to ’ontiac. It appears ona plate in the front order parts. On this label is: :orner of the instrument panel, on the lriver’s side. You can see it if you look hrough the windshield from outside your 0 your VIN, rehicle. The VIN also appears on the 0 the model designation, Jehicle Certification and Service Parts 0 paint information, and abels and the certificates of title and egistration. 0 a list of all production options and special equipment. Engine identification The eighth character in your VIN is the :ngine code. This codewill help you dentify your engine, specifications, and eplacement parts. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Don’t add anything electrical to your Pontiac unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle has an air bag system.. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your Pontiac see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac” in the Index. ’: Service & Appearance Care To identify and check fuses, refer to the Fuse panel, which is behind the lower glove box door, and the fuse usage chart later in this section. A fuse puller is clipped inside the fuse panel door. Place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of thefuse. Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out. Fuses & Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are mtected from short circuits by a :ombination of fuses, circuit breakers, lnd fusible thermal links in the wiring tself. This greatly reduces the chance of 'ires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band insidethc fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the correct size. BS Position CTSY 6 7 & HORN €33 STOP-HA2 RDO 2 Oa R-WIPER rn F-WIPER ELC HORN STOP HAZ F PUMP AUX TAIL 20 15 15 10 20 15 ECM 10 TURN BKJ GAGE LPS 15 7.5 7.5 ABS RD02 R/WIPER F/WIPER IGN 3 15 20 25 15 HTR A/C RR BLWR 25 25 IGN F-PUMP AUX Rating (AMP.) 15 R-BLWR Fuse Panel (3.I L V6) Circuitry Dome Lamm, Courtesv Lamps, Power Door Lock Switches, Glove Box Lamp, Powkr'Mirrors,Power Sliding Delay Lock Module Auto Level Control, Underhood Lamp Horns, Horn Relay, Safety Belt Buzzer Front/Rear Turn Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Rear Stop Lamps, Instrument Cluster Turn Indicator Lamps, Cruise Brake Switch Fuel Pump, Oil Pressure Sender/Fuel Pump Switch Radio, Front Cigar Lighter, Accessory Power Outlet Front Park Lamps, Rear Tail Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Licens Plate Lamp, Radio, Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Power Sliding Door Throttle Body Fuel Injection, Fuel Pump Relay, Elec. Vac. Reg. Valve, Elec. Control Module, Elec. Spark Control Module Frontmear Turn Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Cluster Turn Telltale, Back-up Lamps Cluster, Anti-Lock Brake System Lamp Module, Elec. Level Control Sensor Cluster, Radio, Wiper Switch, Headlamp Switch, Rear Blower Switch, Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Door Switch Illumination, Front/Rear Ashtray Illumination Bulbs Anti-Lock Brake System Radio Rear Wipermasher Motors Front Wipermasher Motor A/C Compressor, A/C Solenoid Box, Compressor Relay, Temp. Door Motor, Low Blower Relay; Heat/Vent/AV Control Head; Cruise Module; Cooling Fan Relay; Rear Defogger Relay; Key Chime; Daytime Running Lights Module; Vehicle Speed Sensor Buffer and Generator Charge Discrete, Transaxle Converter Clutch Switch Front/Rear Blower Motors, High Blower Relay Rear Blower, Rear Heat/Vent/AC Service & Appearance Care Position CTSY r& RDO 2 p?a"r R-WIPER TURN BIU prpl GAGE €33 PKS F-WIPER $ p-"11 INJ 3365 173 LPS 3 ELC HORN ;TOP HAZ 20 :DO 1/AUX TAIL 20 15 15 15 ABS 3 ECM rURN B/U 10 15 GAGE 7.5 INJ LPS 7.5 R-BLWR Fuse Panel (3800 V6) . . .246 Rating (AMP.) 15 20 RD02 R/WIPER F/WIPER IGN 15 20 25 HTR A/C RR BLWR 25 25 15 Circuitry Dome Lamps, Courtesy Lamps, Power Door Lock Switches, Glove Box Lamp, Power Mirrors, Power Sliding Delay Lock Module Auto Level Control, Underhood Lamp Horns, Horn Relay, Safety Belt Buzzer Front/Rear Turn Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, Rear Stop Lamps, Instrument Cluster Turn Indicator Lamps Radio, Front Cigar Lighter, Accessory Power Outlet Front Park Lamps, Rear Tail Lamps, Front Side Marker Lamps, License Plate Lamp, Radio, Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Power Sliding Door Anti-Lock Brake System Mass Air Flow Sensor, Electronic Control Module Frontmear Turn Lamps,Front Side Marker Lamps, Cluster Turn Telltale, Back-up Lamps Cluster, Anti-Lock Brake System Lamp Module, Elec. Level Control Sensor Injector 3365 Fuse - Remote Location (See Page247) Cluster, Radio, Wiper Switch, Headlamp Switch, Rear Blower Switch, Heat/Vent/AC Control Head, Door Switch Illumination, Front/Rear Ashtray Illumination Bulbs Radio Rear Wipermasher Motors Front Wiper/Washer Motor A/C Solenoid Box, Temp. Door Motor, Low Blower Relay; Heat/Vent/AC Control Head; Cooling Fan Relay; Rear Defogger Relay; Key Chime; Daytime Running Lights Module; Transaxle Converter Clutch Solenoid and Generator Charge Discrete Front/Rear Blower Motors, High Blower Relay Rear Blower, Rear Heat/Vent/AC P Lh" Circuit BreakevRelay Panel Zircuit breakers and relaysare located in the circuit breaker/relay panel. This is ocated behind the panel under theglove box, near the passenger's door. Position Rating Circuitry (AMP.) 1 2 15 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 30 30 30 Hazard Flasher With 3800 V6 engine only: Canister Purge Solenoid,A/C Clutch Control Relay, Cruise Control Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Power Windows Circuit Breaker Power Seat/Power Sliding Door Motor Circuit Breaker Rear Defogger Circuit Breaker Air Conditioning Blower Relay Horn Relay Chime Module Defogger Timer Relay . Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) Junction Block Fuse You'll find this fuse under the hood in the ABS junction block, located next to the remote positive jump starting terminal. To open the junction block, press in on both sides of the cover. 247. .. Service & Appearance Care - Headlight Wiring The headlight wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the light switch. An electrical overload will cause the lights to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. -If thishappens, have your headlight system checked right away. Windshield Wipers lnjector 3365 Fuse '3800 V6 ENGINE ONLY) 1'his 20-amp fuse is located underhood, 0In a bracket just behind the passenger S ide headlight. It is mounted on the face 0If the bracket in the position closest to thl Plassenger side of the vehicle. The fuse Siervices the injectors, fuel pump, oil Plressure sender and fuel pdmp'switch. 7'0 access the fuse, pry back the latch wit1 a screwdriver, then pull down on'the base 0If the unit. If you need to replace the f use, be sure to use a 20-amp fuse. F'ush the base of the unit firmly up into tlhe cover until the latch snaps into the 1(xked position. 248 The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the circuit breaker/relay panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the Zircuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed. Capacities and Specifications EngineCrankcase (All Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When changing filter, up to quart (I12 liter) more oil may be needed. Automatic Transaxle When draining or replacing torque converter, morefluid may be needed. 3-Speed: Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AfterCompleteOverhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-Speed: Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . After CompleteOverhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling System 3.1L V6 Engine: With Heater Only ............................................ With Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With Rear Heater (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800 V6 Engine: Air With Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With Rear Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With Rear Heater (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant,AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. I f the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask your Pon.tiac dealer. FuelTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 quarts 3.80 L I 12 12 4 quarts 7 quarts 3.80 L 6.60 L 6 quaits 8 quarts 5.70 L 4.70 L quarts quarts 14 quarts 11.50 L 12.00 L 13.25 L quarts 10.75 L 13 quarts 12.25 L 13 quarts 12.25 L See refrigerant charge labelunder hood. 11 20 gallons 76.00 L NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. 249.. . Service & Appearance Care Capacities and Specifications(CONT.) Power Steering 3.1L V6 Engine: PumpOnly ............................................... 0.50 L .. 1 pint Complete System .......................................... 0.60 L .. 1 1/4 pint 3800 V6 Engine: PumpOnly ................................................. 1 pint 0.50 L Complete System ............................................ 1 1/2 pint 0.70 L Tire Pressures, Sizes ........................................... See Certification/Tiri=label on driver’s door. Wheel NutTorque ............................................. 100 pound-feet (140 Nmm) NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. ..250 Engine Specifications 3.1L V 4 ENGINE 3800 V6 ENGINE D ................................ L Type ............................... V6 ............................... V6 ........................ 3.1 Liters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Liters .................... 8.5: 1 ............................. 9.0: 1 VINEngineCode Displacement ..................... Compression Ratio Firing Order ......................... ThermostatTemperature Specification .... 1-2-3-4-5-6 ........................ 195"F (9 1"C) ...................... 1-6-5-4-3-2 195°F (91"C) I Normal Maintenance Replacemenf Parts AirCleanerElement ................... AC Type A-773C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A-974C EngineOil Filter. ..................... ACType PF-51 ..................... AC Type PF-47 PCVValve .......................... AC Type CV-789C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type CV-892C AC Type oR43TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gap: 0.045 inch AC Type 4 1-600 Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) DL 20 16 .......................... DL 2016 Spark Plugs ......................... RemoteLockControlBatteries (2) . . . . . . . 251 ... Service & Appearance Care Replacement Bulbs BULB OUTSIDE LIGHTS Back-up Lights ................................................ .................................. License PlateLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Parkingnurn Signal Lights Halogen Headlights Outer ....................................................... Inner ....................................................... Front Side Marker Lights ......................................... Stop/Tail/Turn Signal Lights Upper 2 Positions ............................................. Lower 2 Positions ............................................. UnderhoodLight ............................................... 3057 3057NA 194 9006 9005 194NA 194 2057 561 Replacement Bulbs (COMT.) INSIDE LIGHTS Courtesy Lights CargoArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Sliding Door Stepwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FrontFloor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 194 Reading Light(s) Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 906 Dome Light(s) Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 561 Glove Compartment Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 IndicatorLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Turn Signal Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 253 .. Notes . 254 I KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Part 7 Maintenance Schedule Introduction T h i s part covers the maintenance A Word About Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . . 256 required for your Pontiac. Your vehicle Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 needs these servicesto retain its How This Part is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 safety. dependabilityand emission A . Scheduled Maintenance Services control performance. Using Your Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Selecting the Right Schedule . . . . . Schedule1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258-259 . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-261 Schedule11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services . . B Owner Inspections & Services AtEachFuelFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Have you purchased the At Least Once a Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 GM Protection Plan? At Least Once a Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265-267 The Plan supplements your C Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267-268 new vehicle warranties. See your Chevrolet dealer for details . D Recommended Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268-270 E Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-272 . . . . 255 .. Maintenance Schedule Introduction A Word About Maintenance We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the timein very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. How This Part is Organized The remainder of this part is divided intofive sections: “Section A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service centerdo these jobs. Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you will find in the schedules in this part. So please read this part and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your Pontiac dealer, the place many GM owners choose to have their maintenance work done. Your dealer can be relied upon to use proper parts and practices. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance or the removal of important components can significantly affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or even the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to help keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. If you are skilled enough todo some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. You will find a list of publications and how to get them in this manual. See “Service Publications’.’in the Index. “Section B: Owner Checks and Services” tellsyou what should be checked whenever you stop for fuel.It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition. “Section C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your Pontiac dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform. “Section D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants” lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether youdo the work yourself or have it done. “Section E: Maintenance’ Record” providesa place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this section. This will help you determinewhen your next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. Section A: Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule This section tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedulethem. Your Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. If you go to your dealer for yourservice needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people will pkrform the work using genuine GM parts. These schedules are for vehicles that: carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limitson your vehicle’s Certificationrnire label. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in the Index. are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. use the recommended unleaded fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index. Selecting the Right Schedule First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow: Schedule I Is any one of these true for your vehicle? Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km). 0 Most trips are less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside temperatures are below freezing. The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in door-to-door delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic). 0 You operate your vehicledusty in areas. .- .‘i. ..I , You tow a trailer. If any one (or more) of these is true for your driving, follow Schedule I. Schedule I1 Follow Schedule I1 only if none of the above conditions is true. 257. .. Maintenance Schedule Scheduled Maintenance Services ScheduleI Follow Schedule I if your car is MAINLY driven under one or more of the following conditions: 0 0 0 0 0 When most trips are less than 4 miles (6 kilometers). When most trips are less than 10 miles ( 16 kilometers) and outside temperatures remain below freezing. When most trips include extended idling and/or frequent low-speed operation as in stop-and-go traffic. Towing a trailer.”?‘ When operating in dusty areas. Schedule I should also be followed if the car is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications. WHAT TO SERVICE (See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” following Schedules I and 11) WHEN TO PERFORM Miles (kilometers) or Months, Whichever Occurs First Item No. I . Engine Oil & Filter Change“ Every 3,000 mi. (5000 km) or 3 months 2. Chassis Lubrication Every 3,000 mi. (5000 km) or 12 months 3. Tire & Wheel Rotation & Inspection At 6,000 mi. (10 000 km) and every 15,000 mi. (25 000 km) or as necessary 4.Engine Accessory Drive Every 60,000 mi. (100 000 km) or60 months. Belt Inspection 5. Cooling System Service” Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km) or 24 months. 6. Transaxle Service See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” following Schedules I and I1 .258 MILES (000) . . 1 KILOMETERS (000) I WHAT TO SERVICE I r- MILES (000) The services shownin this schedule up to 48,000 miles (80 000 km) should be Derformed after 48,000 miles at the same intervals. An Emission Control Service. The US. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined t h n t the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liobilily prior to the compleiion o f vehicle useful life. General Motors. however. urges that a11 recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded i n "Section E:Maintenance Record". 259. . Maintenance Schedule Scheduled Maintenance Services ScheduleI1 Follow Schedule I1 ONLY if none of the driving conditions specified in Schedule I apply. WHAT TO SERVICE (See ‘,‘Explanationof Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ following Schedules I and 11) Item No. 1. Engine Oil & Filter Change* Oil Filter Change* WHEN TO PERFORM Miles (kilometers) or Months, Whichever Occurs First Every 7,500 mi. (12 500 km) or 12 months MlLES (000) KILOMETERS (000) 87.5 75 0 100 0 0 0 At first and then every other oil change 2. Chassis Lubrication Every 7,500 mi. (12 500 km) or 12 months 3. Tire & Wheel Rotation & Inspection At 7,500 mi. (12 500 km) and then every 15,000 mi. (25 000 k m ) or as necessary 4.Engine Accessory Drive Belt Every 60,000 mi. (100 000 km) or 60 months 0 5. Cooling System Service” Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km) or 24 months 0 6 . Transaxle Service See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” following Schedules I and I1 Inspection 0 0 0 0 WHAT TO SERVICE (See Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services Following Schedules I and 11) Item No. 7. Spark Plug Replacement* WHEN TO PERFORM Miles (kilometers) or Months, Whichever Occurs First Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km) MILES (000) KILOMETERS (000) 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100 0 0 ~ 8. Spark Plug Wire Inspection* 9. EGR System Inspection (3.1L Code D engine only)*? 10.Air Cleaner Filter Replacement” 1 1. Air Cleaner Inspection (3.1L Code D engine only)*f‘ 12. Fuel Tank, Cap& Lines Inspection*? 13.Engine Timing and Distributor Check (3.1L Code D engine only)*? 0 Every 60,000 mi.(100 000 km) or 60 months 0 See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” following Schedules I and I1 Every 30,000 mi. (50 000 km) Every 60,000 mi. ( 100 000 km) or 60 months ~~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 1 The services shown in this schedule upto 60,000 miles (100 000 km) should be performed after 60,000 miles at the same intervals. * An Emission Control Service. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilily prior to the completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors. however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded in “Section E:Maintenance Record”. 261 ... Maintenance Schedule Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services Following are explanations of the services listed in Schedule I and Schedule 11. The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Section D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. NOTE: To determine your engine’s displacement and code, see “Engine Identification” in the Index. 1. Engine Oil and Filter Change* -- Always use SG or SH Energy Conserving I1 oils of proper viscosity. The “SH” or “SG” designation may be shown alone or in combination with others, such as “SH/CD”, “SH, SG, CD”, “SG/CD”, etc. 2. Chassis Lubrication -- Lubricate suspension and steering linkage. Lubricate the Transaxle shift linkage, and parking brake cable guides, underbody contact points and linkage. 3. Tire and Wheel Rotation and Inspection -- For proper wear and maximum tire life, rotate your tiresfollowing the instructions in this manual. See “Tires, Inspection & Rotation” in the Index. Check the tires for uneven wear or damage. If you see irregular or premature wear, check the wheel alignment. Check for damaged wheels also. 4. Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection -- Inspect the drive belt for cracks, fraying, wear and proper tension. Replace as needed. 5. Cooling System Service* -- Drain, flush and refill the system with new or approved recycled coolant conforming to GM Specification 1825M. Keep coolant at the proper mixture as specified. See “Coolant” in the Index. This provides proper freeze and boil protection, corrosion inhibitor level and maintains properengine operating temperature. Inspect hoses and replace if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Tighten screw-type hose clamps. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. Wash the pressure cap and neck. To help ensure proper operation, we recommend a pressure test of both the cooling system and the pressurecap. * An Emission Control Service. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded in “Section E:Maintenance Record”. ...262 .. : . 2 “ - c $$ 6. Transaxle Service -- Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles (25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions: 0 In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. 0 In hilly or mountainous terrain. 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. (With some models, you shouldn’t ever tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.) 0 Uses such as found in taxi, police car or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change boththe fluid and filter every 100,000 miles ( 166 000 km). 7. Spark Plug Replacement” -- Replace spark plugs with the proper type. See “Replacement Parts” in the Index. 8. Spark Plug Wire Inspectioa” -- Inspect for burns, cracks or other damage, Check the bootfit at the distributor or coils and at the spark plugs. Replace wiresas needed. 9. Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System InSpption (3.1L Code D engine only)*? -- Conduct the EGR system ,*! service as described in the service manual. To purchase a service manual, see “Service Publications’’ in tfihndex. ‘1 10. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement” -- Replace every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or more often under dusty conditions. Ask your dealer for the proper replacement intervals for your driving conditions. 11. Air Cleaner Inspection (3.1L Code D engineonly)*? -Inspect all hoses and ducts for proper hookup. Make sure the valve works properly. 12.Fuel Tank, Cap andLines Inspection*? -- Inspec‘t .fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel ‘cap gasket for aneven filler neck imprint or any damage. Replace parts as needed. Periodic replacement of the fuel filter is not required. 13.Engine Timing and Distributor Check (3.1L Code,D engine only)*? -- Adjust the timing to the underhoqd label specifications. Inspect the inside and outside of the distributor cap and rotor for cracks, carbon tracking and corrosion. Clean or replace as needed. C Maintenance Schedule Section B: Owner Checksand Services Listed below are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Section D. At Each Fuel Fill (Itis important foryou or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.) CHECK OR SERVICE Engine Oil Level WHAT TO DO - Check the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary.See“Engine Oil” in the Index for further details. Engine Coolant Level Check the engine coolant level and add the proper coolantmix if necessary. See “Coolant”intheIndex for further details. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Checkthewindshieldwasherfluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details. 1 At Least Once a Month CHECK OR SERVICE Tire Inflation Cassette Deck At Least Once a Year WHAT TO DO ‘Check tireinflation. Make sure they are inflated to the pressures specified on the Certificationnire label located on the rear edge of the driver’s door. See “Tires”’ in the Indexfor further details. ‘CHECKOR SERVICE Key Lock Cylinders Body Lubrication Cleancassettedeck. Cleaning should be done every15hours oftapeplay. See “Audio Systems” in theIndex for further ‘details. WHAT TO DO Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Section D. Lubricate all body door hinges, including the liftgate. Also lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the hood, sliding door track, rear compartment, glove box door and any folding seat hardware. Section D tells you what to use. g r t e r Switch 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. I 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the index if necessary) and the regular brake. . 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in “P” (Park) or “ N ’ (Neutral). If the starter worksinany other position, your vehicle needs service. 265 ... Maintenance Schedule CHECKOR SERVICE Steering Column Lock I WHAT TO DO While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the key to “LOCK” in each shift lever position. 0 I The key should turn to “LOCK” only when the shift lever is in “P” (Park). CHECK OR SERVICE Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle “P” (Park) Mechanism Check WHAT TO DO The key should come out only in “LOCK.” 0 To check the parking brake: With the engine running and transmission in “N’ (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressurefromtheregularbrake pedal. Do thisuntilthevehicle is held by the parking brake only. 0 To check the“P” (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: Shift to “P” (Park). Then release all brakes. CHECK OR SERVICE Underbody Flushing I WHAT TO DO At least everyspring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughlyany areas where mudand other debris cancollect. Section C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twicea year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service department or other qualified service center dothese jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. I CHECK OR SERVICE Restraint Systems CHECK OR SERVICE Steering, Suspension and Front-WheelDrive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines andhoses for proper hookup, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary. Exhaust System Inspection Inspectthecomplete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system.Lookforbroken,damaged, missing or out-of-position partsas well as open seams, holes, loose connections, or other conditions which could cause a let heat build-upin the floor pan or could exhaust fumes intothevehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. Throttle Linkage [nspection Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding, and for damaged ormissing parts. Replace parts as needed. WHAT TO DO Now and then, makesure all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, anchorages and reminder systems are working properly. Look for any loose parts or damage. If you see anything that might keep a restraint system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. WHAT TO DO Maintenance Schedule CHECK OR SERVICE Brake System [nspection Section D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants WHAT TO DO inspect thecomplete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hookup, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking. NOTE:A low brake fluid level can indicate worn disc brake pads which may need to be serviced, Also, if the brake system warning light stays on or comes on, something maybe wrong with thebrake system. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. If your anti-lock brake system warning light stays on, comes on or flashes, something may be wrong with the anti-lock brake system. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your GM dealer. USAGE Engine Oil FLUIDlLUBRICANT API service SH or SG Energy Conserving I1 oils of the proper viscosity. The “SG” or “SH” designation may be shown alone or in combination with others, such as “SH/CD,” “SG/CD” or “SH,SG,CD,” etc. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of water (preferably distilled) andgood quality ethylene glycol base antifreeze (GMPart No. 1052753 or equivalent) conforming to GM Specification 1825M or approved recycled coolant conforming to GM Specification 1825M. Hydraulic Brake System Delco Supreme 1l@Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 1052535or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). ~~ - ~. - USAGE Parking Brake Guides Power Steering System Automatic Transaxle FLUID/LUBRICANT Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. GM Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 1052884 or equivalent). Lubricate with Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345120), or synthetic SAE 5W-30 engine oil. Automatic Transaxle Shift Linkage Engine oil. Chassis Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. Lubrication1052497or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Windshield Washer Solvent a. Pivots and Spring Anchor a. Engine oil. b. Release Pawl b. Chassis lubricant (GM Part No. 1052497 or equivalent) orlubricant meeting requirements NLGI of Grade 2, Category LB or GC-LB. DEXRON@-111 or DEXRON@-IIE Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent. FLUID/LUBRICANT USAGE Hood Latch Assembly Hood and Door Hinges, Liftgate Hinge and Linkage, Fuel Door Hinge, Folding Seat Hardware, Rear Compartment Lid Hinges Engine oil or Lubriplate Lubricant (GM Part No. 1050109). Sliding Door Track LubriplateLubricantaerosol(GMPart No. 1052349) or equivalent white grease. Weatherstrips Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579 or equivalent). See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended replacement filters, valves and spark plugs. 269. .. Maintenance Schedule Section E: Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the columns indicated. When completing the Maintenance Performed column, insert the numbers from the ScheduleI or Schedule I1 maintenance charts which correspond to the maintenance performed. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them. I Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE MAINTENANCE SERVICED BY READING PERFORMED . L . 270 .~ . Maintenance Record DATE ODOMETER READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 271 ... Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Record J ODOMETER READING DATE . . -.. .- ...272 BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED SERVICED U 1 L L H e r e you will find out howto contact Pontiac if you need assistance. This part also tells you how to obtain service publicationsand how to repori any safety defects. Part 8 Customer Assistance Information Part 8 includes Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 BBB AUTO LINE-Alternative Dispute Resolution Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 273 ... Customer Assistance Information t-J I' Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and Pontiac. Normally, any concern with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's Sales or Service Departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the Sales, Service, or Parts Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager. STEP TWO-- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-PM CARES. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance Center in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, call 1-809-763- 1315. In all other overseas locations, contact GM North American Export Sales in Canada by calling 1-905-644-41 12. For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: 0 Your name, address, home and business telephone number Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate above the left top of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) Dealership nameandlocation 0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage 0 Natureofconcern We encourage you to call the toll free number listed previously in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Pontiac, write to: United States Pontiac Division Customer Assistance Center One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac, MI 48340-2952 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Assistance Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, OntarioL 1H 8P7 When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your concern will likelybe resolved in the dealership, using the dealership's facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step One firstif you have a concern. Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired (TDD) GM Participation in BBB AUTO LINE Alternative Dispute Resolution Program" To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Pontiac has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer Assistance Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) can communicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-TDD-PONT (TDD users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) *This program may not be available in all states, depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to your Warrantyand Owner Assistance information booklet. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in this program. Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is very successful. 275.. . Customer Assistance Information If you are not satisfied after following the GM Participation in Customer Satisfaction Procedure, you BBB AUTO LINE may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them atthe Alternative Dispute ‘-llowing address: Resolution Program* BBB AUTO LINE (CONI) There may be instances where an impartial third-party can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these disagreements Pontiac voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle disputes between customers and automobile manufacturers. This program is available free of charge to customers who currently own orlease a GM vehicle. .276 Council of Better Business Bureaus 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203 Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary between you and Pontiac.If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled where zligible customersmay present their case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject.If you accept To file a claim, you will be askedto the decision, GM will be bound by that provide your name and address, your decision. The entire dispute resolution vehicle identification number (VIN), and procedure should ordinarily take about a statement of the nature of your Forty days from the time you file a ,claim complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle until a decision is made. age and mileage, and other factors. Some state lawsmay require you to use this program before filinga claim with a state-run arbitration program orin the courts. For further information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-PM-CARES. REPURTZNG SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNZTED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA U.S. Department of Transportatior, Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. REPORTZNG SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352 Customer Assistance Information w REPORTZNG SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac dealer. In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-PM-CARES , or write: Pontiac Division Customer Assistance Center One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac, MI 48340-2950 In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Assistance Center, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7 . 278 Pontiac’s Roadside Assistancetoll-free number is staffedby a team of trained technical advisors who are available 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year. Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program Security While You Travel 1-800-ROADSIDE 1-800-762-3743 As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program This value-added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road. We will provide the following services for 3 years/36,000 miles, atno expense to you: Vehicle out of fuel Keys locked in vehicle Tow to nearest dealer for warranty Change a flat tire Jump starts We have quick, easyaccess to telephone numbers of the following services depending on your needs: 0 Hotels Glassreplacement Rental vehicles or taxis 0 Police, fire department or hospitals In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However when other outside services are utilized, our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur. For prompt and efficientassistance when calling, please have the following information available to give the advisor: 0 Location of vehicle Telephone number of your location 0 Vehicle model, year, and color Mileage of vehicle 0 Vehicleidentificationnumber Vehiclelicenseplatenumber Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac’s judgement the claims become obsessive in frequency or type of occurrence. While we hope that you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance-1 -800-ROADSIDE or 1-800-762-3743. Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance Program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the U.S.A. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer orcall 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Please consult your dealer for details.In Canada, please consult your GM Dealer for information on courtesy transportation. Service Publications Information on how to obtain Product Service Publicationsand Indexes as described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states (and the District of Columbia) and only for cars and light trucks with GVWR less than 10,OOQ pounds (4 536 kg). In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins and Indexes can be obtained by writing to: General Motors of Canada Limited Service PublicationsDepartment 1908 Colonel Sam Dr. Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Pontiac regularly sends its dealers useful service bulletins about Pontiac products. Pontiac Courtesy Pontiac monitors product performance in Transportation the field. We then prepare bulletins for For warranty repairs during the BUMPER servicing our products better. Now, you TO BUMPER coverage period, interim can get these bulletins too. transportation may be available under the Pontiac Courtesy Transportation Program. 279 Customer Assistance Information Service Publications (CONT.) Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with the ’latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs. Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way to fix your tehicle. They can help a technician service your vehicle better. Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small number of cars or trucks. Your Pontiac dealer or a qualified technician may have to determine if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle. you’ll find in the index and how you can Some PSP’s pertaining toa particular model year vehicle may be publishedin get one: later years, and these would be listed in the later year’s index. When you order an What You’ll Find in the index for a model year that is not over Index: yet, we’ll send you the most recently 0 A list of all PSP’s published by published issue. Check the ordering form Pontiac in a model year (1990 or for indexes for earlier model years. later). PSP’s covering all models of Pontiac vehicles are listed in the same Cut out the ordering form, fill it out, and mail it in. We will then see to it that an index. index is mailed to you. There is no charge 0 Ordering information so you can buy for indexes for the 1990- 1994 model the specific PSP’s you may want. years. 0 Price information for the PSP’s you may want to buy. How You Can Get an Index: Indexes are published periodically. Most of the PSP’s which could potentially Individual PSP’s apply to the most recent Pontiac models If you don’t want to buy all the PSP’s will be listed in the most recent issued by Pontiac for all models in the publication for that model year. This model year, you can buy individual PSP’s, means you may want to wait until the end such as those which may pertain to a of the model year before ordering an particular model. To do this, you will first index, if you are interested in buying need to see our index of PSP’s. It provides PSP’s pertaining to a current model year a variety of information. Here’s what car or truck. ...280 Toll-Free Telephone Number If you wantan additional ordering form for an index, just call toll-free and we’ll be happy to sendyou one. Automated recording equipment will take your name and mailing address.The number to call is 1-800-551-4123. A VERY IMPORTANT REMINDER: These PSP’s are meant for technicians. They are not meant for the “do-it-yourselfer.” Technicians have the equipment, tools, safety instructions, and know-how to do a job quickly and safely. Pontr'ac Service Publications You can get these by using the order form: Pontiac Division Service Manuals are intended for use by professional, qualified technicians. Attemptingrepairs or service without the appropriate training, tools, and equipment couldcause injury to you or others and damageto your vehicle that may cause it not to operate properly. ...282 1994 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications cowring the operationand servicing of pur vehicle can be purchasedby filling outthe Service Publications Order Form in this book and mailing it with your check, money orderor credit card information to Helm, Incorporated(address listedbelow). CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1994 PONTIAC TRANS SPORT PRODUCT SERVfCE PUBLICATIONS SERVfCE MANUALS Product Service Publications (PSP’s), are bulletins, letters and articles Service Manuals have the diagnosis, repair and overhaul information published for trained dealer service personnel. See Service Publicaon engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steertions listed previouslyin this section. ing, body, etc. A cumulative index is published quarterly during the current model Model Form Number Price in the modelyear. year. The indexes list all PSP’s published by Pontiac 1994 Pontiac Trans Sport . . . . . . . . . . . . S-9410-U TBA” PSP Index NOTE: Please specify special bodyor engine types on order form. Write information in the Form Number column.For example: Turbo, Year Convertible. 1994 pspI-94-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free ‘Price to be announced at a tabr date. Call 1-800-782-4356for furtherinformation. 1993 pspI-93-p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free 1992 psP1-92-P ............................... Free OWNER’S INFORMATION 1991 pspI-91-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free Owner publications are written directly for Owners intended and to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The Owner’s PSP Bound BulletinBook (Complete Year Bulletins) Manual includesthe Maintenance Schedule forall models. mber Form Description Year 1992 All PSP’S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-92-PSP-4 15.00 1994 Pontiac Trans Sport Owner’s Manual 1991 All’PSP’s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-91-PSP-4 In Portfolio: Includes&rtfolio, Owner‘s Manualand Warranty Booklet. 15.00 1994PontiacTrans SportIn-Portfolio . . . . . . ..lo260058 $15.00 For subscription information call Helm, Incorporated. Without Portfolio: Includes Owner’s Manual. 1994PontiacTransSportWithoutPortfolio . . .10260060 $10.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Address all inquiries to: HELM, INCORPORATED Service Publications are available for current and past model Pontiac EO. Box 07130 vehicles. To request an order form, please specifyyear and model Detroit, MI 48207 name of vehicle. For information and inquiries call: 1-800-782-4356 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO: Post Office Box 07130,Detroit, Michigan 48207 ORDER TOLL FREE 1-800-782-4356 (Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST) (ATTENTION) (CUSTOMER NAME) (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) (STATE) *Prices are subjectto change without notice and without incurring obligation. * pries to ba ann,,,nccd at a wer date, cell ,-800-782-4356 for furtherinformation. Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization. A restocking fee may apply. (ZIPCODE) NOTE TO CANADIANCUSTOMERS:All listed prices are quoted in US. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.8. funds. To cwer Canadian pastage, add $11.50 plus theUS. Handling Charge. Requests for manuak printed in French shouldbe directed to Canadian General Motors dealerships. Pleasealow adequatetime for postal service. 285 . .. .. .286 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO: Elm Post Office Box 07130, Detroit, Michigan 48207 OIDER TOLL FREE 1-800-782-4356 (Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST) ITEM DESCRIPTION PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER Service Manual Owner's Manual In-Portfolio Owner's Manual Without-Portfolio S-9410-U 10260058 10260060 VEHICLE MODEL YEAR NAME TOTAL PRICE QTY. 3 . Pontiac Trans Sport TBA* * 1994 Sport 1994 Pontiac Trans $15.00 Pontiac Trans S ~ o r t 1994 $10.00 TOTAL MATERIAL NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and [7 Check or Money of the personto whose attention the shipment should be sent. also the name Order payable to USA. please writeto the above address for quotation. Helm, Inc. (USA For purchases outside funds only - do not send cash.) NAME) , 0MasterCard Discover (CUSTOMER (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. ~ [7 VISA 0Card m l BOX NUMBERS) NO.) (APT. Account Number: (CITY CODE) AREA DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. CODE (ZIP ( (STATE) - i ~p u h r c hi a z~ add 4% sales t a x , ~ Handling Charge $4.00 ~ Postage Canadian (See Note Below) GRAND TOTAL ml ml Date mo/yr: (CUSTOMER SIGNATURE) *Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. NOTE TO CANADIAN CUSTOMERS All listed prices are quoted inU.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks *price to be announced at a later date. cell1-800-782-4356 fo, further information. payable in US. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus IheUS.,Handling Charge. Requestsfor manuals printed in Frenchshould be directed to Canadian General Motors dealershlps. Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization. A restocking fee may apply. Please allow adequatetime for postal service. 287. .. 288 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO: KEEEJ Post Office Box 07130,Detroit, Michigan 48207 ORDER TOLL FREE 1-800-782-4356 (Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST) NAME) (CUSTOMER I (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) (STATE) *Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. (ZIP CODE) NOTE TO CANADIANCUSTOMERS:All listedpricesare quoted inU.S. funds,Canadian are to make * *Price to be announced ata later date. Cell 1-800-782-4356 for furtherinformation. Payable in U S fmds. To Canadian postage,add$ll.!X PIIS the US. Handling Charge.Requestsfor manuals printed in French should be directed to Canadian GeneralMotors dealerships. Orders cannotbe returned without prior aulhoriiation. A restocking fee may apply. Please allow adequate time for postalservice. .i 290 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO: elm Post Office Box 07130, Detroit, Michigan 48207 ORDER TOLL FREE 1-800-782-4356 (Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST) PUBLICATIONFORM NUMBER } ITEM DESCRIPTION I S-9410-U 10260058 10260060 Service Manual Owner’s Manual In-Portfolio Owner’s Manual Without-Portfolio VEHICLE MODEL I YEAR NAME Pontiac Trans Sport Pontiac Trans Sport Pontiac Trans Sport 1 I TOTAL MATERIALI I I QTY. EACH PRICE TOTAL TBA’ * 1994 1994 1994 ~ $15.00 $10.00 I NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and Check or Money also the nameof the personto whose attention the shipment should be sent. Order payable to USA. please wriie to the above address for quotation. Helm, Inc. (USA For purchases outside 0 onlyfunds - do not send cash.) (ATTENTION) MasterCard (CUSTOMER NAME) (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O.BOX NUMBERS) NO.) (APT. Account m Number: (Cnv) DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. CODE AREA (STATE) ( *Prices are subjectto change without noticeand without incurring obligation. to be at a call,-800-782-4356 for funher , Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization. A restocking fee may apply. (ZIP CODE) K Expiration Date molyr: I Michigan Purchasers III I lm l m m Canadian Postage (See Note Below) GRAND TOTAL I ml I 1I l m] Check here i f your billing address is different from your shippingaddressshown. ] M (CUSTOMER SIGNATURE) NOTE TO CANADIAN CUSTOMERS:All listed prices are quoted inUS. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $1 1.50 plus the US., Handling Charge. Requests for manuals printed in French shouldbe directed toCanadian General Motors dealershtps. Please allow adequatelime for postal service. 291 ... 292 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or wpe) and _MAILTO: \ mm Post Office Box 07130,Detroit Michi an 48207 I I I I I I GRAND TOTAL I I NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. also the name For purchases outsideU.S.A. please writeto the above address for quotation. NAME) TE) I (CUSTOMER (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) NO.) (APT. (CITY) DAYTIME TELEPHONENO. $%: ( 293 ..294 . , PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDER FORM NOTE: Please complete form below (Print or Type) and MAIL TO: Post Office Box 07130, Detroit, Michigan 48207 ORDER TOLL FREE 1-800-782-4356 (Monday-Friday 8:OO A.M.-6:00 P.M. EST) I ITEM DESCRIPTION PUBLICATION FORM NUMBER I *Prices are subjectto change without noticeand without incurring obligation. * *Price to be announeedat a leter date. Call 1-800-782-4356 for further i n f m a t i m . Orders cannot be returned without prior authorization. A restocking fee may apply. QTY. VEHICLE MODEL NAME I I YEAR NOTE TOCANADlAN CUSTOMERSA i listedprices a= quoted in U.S. MS. Canadian re;iidemare to payable in Us. funds.TO COYBr Canadian postage,add$ll.5Oplusthe US. Handling Charge, Requestsfor manuals printed in French should be,direcfed to Canadmn GeneralMotors dealerships. Pleaseallow adequatetime torpostal service. 295.. . ABS (Anti-LockBrakes) . . . . . . . . 151 ABSWarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Adding BrakeFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. 268 Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 71.72. 130. 243 Engine Cqolant . . 189. 2 19. 249. 268 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211. 268 Power Steering Fluid . 221.250. 269 SoundEquipment . . . . . . : . . . . . 130 Transaxle Fluid. Automatic . . . . . . . . . 217.249. 269 Windshield Washer Fluid . . 222. 269 AdjustingRearSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 25 AirBag ........................ HowItWorks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ReadinessLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 215. 251 AirConditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Air Inflator System . . . . . . . . . . . 95. 193 Alcohol. Driving Under the Influence of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Alcohol in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Alignment.Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 146 Antenna ...................... Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . 189.219.249. 268 Anti-Lock Brake System ......... 151 JunctionBlockFuse . . . . . . . . . . 247 WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Anti-Theft Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Chart ...................... 242 Ashtrays & Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . 96. 99 Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 AM/FM Stereo Radio . . . . . . . . . 131 AM/FM Stereo Radio with Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 AM/FM Stereo Radio with Cassette Player and Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 AM/FM Stereo Radio with Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . 139 Care of Audio Systems . . . . . . . . 145 Delco-LOC Anti-Theft Feature . 141 . . 144 RadioReception.FortheBest Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Steering Wheel Touch Controls . . . . 143 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Automatic Transaxle Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . 2 17. 249. 269 Checking Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 73 Shifting ..................... Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . 70. 71 Blowout.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Brakes ABS ....................... 151 . . . . . . . . . . 114 ABSWarningLight Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. 268 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 77 Parking ..................... PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 225 Replace .................... Warning Lights . . . . . . . 113. 114. 152 Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 BrakeSystemWarning Light . . . . . . 113 Brakes.Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 151 Braking ....................... Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 154 “Break-In. New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 69 Brightness Intensity Control . . . . . . . 89 18 Buckling Up .................... Bulb Replacement 252 Chart ...................... Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226. 252 Taillight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227. 252 Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 FrontTurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Batteries. Remote Lock Control . . . . . 60 Rear LightBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 225. 304 Battery .................... 252 Taillight .................... AcidWarning . . . . . . . . . . . 179.226 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 C D Player Anti-Theft Feature . . . . 141 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . 249 Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Carbon Monoxide in Exhaust . . . 68. 80 Block Heater. Engine . . . . . . . . . 72. 2 15 Cassette TapePlayer . . . . 133. 136. 145 . BBB 297 a CenterLapBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Certificationnire Label . . . . . . . . . . 228 Chains Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202. 235 Trailer Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Checking Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15 BrakeFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 189. 2 19 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . 221 Safety Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . 209 Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Transaxle Fluid Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 17 Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . 241 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Child SecurityLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Circuit Breakermelay Panel . . . . . . . 247 Circuit Breakers & Fuses . . . . . . . . . 244 City Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Cleaner. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15. 251 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Cassette Player and Tapes . . . . . . 145 Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 236 Fabric ..................... Finish Care .................. 239 Foreign Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 238 Glass ...................... Inside of Your Pontiac . . . . . . . . 236 Leather or Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Outside of Your Pontiac . . . . . . . 239 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Top of Instrument Panel . . . . . . . 238 Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . 24 1 Vinyl or Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 236.238. 239 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 White Sidewall Tires . . . . . . . . . . 240 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . 239 ClimateControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Clock. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Clusters. Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . 108 Collision Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1 Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Climate Control System . . . . . . . 123 Quick Reference Guide . . . . . . . . 120 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.128 Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . 195. 202. 304 Compartment. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Control. Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249. 268 Checking & Adding . . . . . . 189.219 Proper Mixture to Use . . . . 189. 22C Safety Warnings About . . . . . . . . . . . . 189.220. 22 1 Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Coolant Heater. Engine . . . . . . . 72.215 Cooling System . . . . 189.219.249. 304 :overs.Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 h i s e Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 :up Holder ..................... 99 ZustomerAssistanceInformation . . 274 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . 88 Dead Battery:What toDo . . . . . . . . 177 Defects. ReportingSafety . . . . . . . . 277 DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . . . . . . . 128 Defogger.RearWindow DefoggingYourWindows . . . . . . . . 127 Dome Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89. 93 55 Door Locks ..................... Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 75.164.173 DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Driving At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 City ....................... 161 Controlling a Skid . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defensively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 162 Freeway .................... HillandMountain . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 In a Foreign Country . . . . . . . . . . 208 In theRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 LongDistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 On SnoworIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 156 Passing .................... Through Deep Standing Water . . . 72 WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . 71.72. 130. 243 Electric Outside Mirror Control . . . . . 97 ElectronicLevelControl . . . . . 104. 229 Emergencies.Braking in . . . . . . . . . 154 Emergencies on theRoad . . . . . . . . . 175 Emergencies. Steering in . . . . . . . . . 155 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 EmergencyTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . I8 1 Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . 72. 2 15 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . 189. 2 19. 249 1 Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . 72. 215 EngineCoolantTemperatureGage . 113 EngineExhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 EngineIdentification . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 EngineOil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 1. 268 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 14 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Checking & Adding . . . . . . . . . . 21 1 Disposing of Used Oil . . . . . . . . 2 15 Energy Conserving . . . . . . . 2 12. 2 13 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68. 90 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 12 When to Change . . . . . 2 15.258. 260 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1 Engine.Starting . . . . . . . . . . 70. 71. 175 ERT AM/FM Stereo Radio with Cassette Player and Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13f Ethanol in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Exhaust Dangerous Gas in . . . . . . . . . . 68. 8C Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 111 Parking with the Engine Parked with the Engine Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. 80 Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79. 80 Zxpectant Mothers. Use of Fuses & Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . 244 Safety. Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3xpressway Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Zxtender. Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 G a g e s Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . 113 Zxterior Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Fuel ........................ 111 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ;an Warnings . . . . . . 178.179.187. 210 Gasoline Gasoline Tank, Filling Your . . . . . . . 208 Zilling theFuelTank . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 . . . . . . . . . . 304 Gas Station Information zilter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3ear Positions Air . . . . . . . . . . . . 215.251.259. 261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3earshift Lever Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251.258.260 ..................... 98 3love Box Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 ?lashers. Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . 176 3raphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Flooded Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71. 72 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 226. 252 HazardWarning Flashers . . . . . . . . . 176 Fluid & Taillight. Headlight Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223. 268 Removing and Replacing . . . 226. 227 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Headlights .................... 226 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . 221. 269 High-Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 88 Transaxle . . . . . . . 2 17.249.269. 304 “On” Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Windshield Washer . . . . . . . 222. 269 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . 226. 252 Freeway Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207. 304 Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . 275 Alcohol in Fuel . . . . . . . . . . 207. 208 Heater ........................ 121 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ......... 72. 215 Heater. Engine Block Exhaust Warnings . . . . . . . . . . 68. 8C Filling YourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Heater. Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 72. 215 Fuels with Alcohol . . . . . . . . . . . 20i High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88. 159 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . 201; Hilland Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . 164 I 299. HoodRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209.304 Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 10 Warning.OverheatedEngine . . . 186 Horn .......................... 81 Hot Engine. Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . 113186.188.189 Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160.22 1 Identification Engine ..................... 243 Label. Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . 243 Number.Vehicle (VIN Code) . . . 243 Idling Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 74. 79 If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice. or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Ignition Key ........................ 54 IlluminatedEntrySystem . . . . . . . 61 Positions .................... 69 Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Inflation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . 108 InstrumentPanel Intensity Control . . 89 Instrument Panel Warning Lights . . . 110 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . 93 Control ..................... 89 FrontReading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Rear Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Jack. Tire .................... ...300 194 lump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 2oadingYourVehicle . . . . . . . 104.228 Electronic Level Control . . . . . . . 229 JunctionBlockFuseABS . . . . . . . . 247 Locks Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Keyless Entry. Remote . . . . . . . . . . 58 55 Door ....................... Key in Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 KeylessEntrySystem ..................... 58 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Long Distance Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 54 Low Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Keys .......................... LowFuelWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 L a n e Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Low Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Low TractionLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Lap-Shoulder Belt Front .................... 22.30 Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 31 LuggageCarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Rear ........................ Use byChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Leather. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Maintenance Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 268 Level Control. Electronic . . . . . . . . . 104 MaterialsChart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 67 Liftgate ........................ 270 Record ..................... AjarWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 116 . . . . . . . 251. 252 Replacement Parts 99 Lighter ........................ Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257.262 Lights Services.Scheduled . . . . . . . . . . 257 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89.93 WhenTrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . 257 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . 88 . . . . . . 116 93 MalfunctionIndicatorLamp Dome ...................... Low Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ManualFrontSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Low Traction Warning . . . . . . . . 115 MasterCylinder.Brake . . . . . . . . . . 223 “On” Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Methanol in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 93 MileageIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Reading ..................... Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Mirrors Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Safety BeltReminder . . . . . . . . . . 21 InsideManual Daymight . . . . . . . 96 Taillights .................... 227 Manual Remote Control . . . . . . . . 97 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . 97 Under Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Visor Vanity WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Park. Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 PassengerBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30. 31 N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Passing ....................... 156 New Vehicle “Break-In” . . . . . . . . . . . 239 PolishingandWaxing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Power Accessory Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . 94 NightDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Octane Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 207 Power Outlet.Accessory . . . . . . . . . . 94 109 Power Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Odometer ..................... Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Power Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Oil. Engine . . . . . . . . 21 1.262.268. 304 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 221.269 2 12 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82.248 Quality .................... Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 12 Pregnancy. Use ofSafety UsedOil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15 BeltsDuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 When to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 15 Problemsonthe Road . . . . . . . . . . . 175 OilPressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Oil Pressure Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 PulseWindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . 90 OperationofLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 OutsideRearviewMirrors . . . . . . . . . 96 Radiator Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Overdrive.Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . 190. 22 1 OverheatedEngine . . . . . . . . . . 186. 188 Radio ........................ 131 Overheated Engine Coolant Rain.Drivinginthe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Gage ....................... 113 Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 RearAirVents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 P a i n t ........................... MountainDriving RearWindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . 128 Rear Window Wiper and Washer . . . . 90 RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Reminder Lights. Safety Belt . . . . . . . 21 Remote ControlMirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Remote KeylessEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Remote Positive Battery Terminal . . 179 Removable RearBucket Seats . . . . . . 16 ReplacementBulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ReplacementFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 ReplacingBrakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts Aftera Crash . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.5 2 Replacing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Replacing Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades ...................... 228 ReportingSafetyDefects . . . . . . . . . 277 Restraints.Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Restraint.Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . 164 Roads.HillandMountain RoadsideAssistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Stuck.If You Are . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Rotation.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 RunningLights.Daytime . . . . . . . . . . 88 Rear Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ChemicalSpotting . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1 RearFan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122. 126 FinishCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Seats FinishDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Rear Adjusting .................... 15 Parking . . . . . . . . 16 Dump and Stow Feature AtNight .................... 62 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. 12. 14 174 OnHills .................... Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . 80 ThirdRowEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Saddlebags With the Engine Running . . . . 79. 80 Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . 100 Safety Belts ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 301 Adults ...................... 21 Built-InChild Restraint . . . . . . . . 37 Center Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 33 Checking .................... 35 Children .................... Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Child Restraints. Where to Put . . . 43 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 51 Extender .................... How to Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Passenger Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Pregnancy. Use During . . . . . . . . . 30 Questions & Answers . . . 20. 23.24. 25 Rear SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reminder Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 RightFront.AdultPassenger . . . . 30 Smaller ChildrenandBabies . . . . 36 Top Strap .................... 44 Torn . . . . . . . . . . . . ;. . . . . . . . . . . 51 Twisted ..................... 25 Vehicles First Sold in Canada . . . . . 2 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. 2 1 Why You Should Wear Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. 20 Safety Chains (Trailer) . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Safety Defects.Reporting . . . . . . . . 277 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . 257 17 Seat Belts ...................... 8 Seat Controls .................... Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . 302 Manual RecliningSeatback . . . . . . 9 Power Seat.Six-Way . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Reclining Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Rear Seats Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . 11. 12.14 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ThirdRowEntry . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Seats ........................... 8 "Service Engine Soon" Light . . . . . . 116 Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Service Parts Identification Label . . 243 Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Service Publications Order Form . . . 285 Service StationInformation . . . . . . . 304 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Pontiac ....................... 29 Setting theClock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Setting the Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . 110 Shifting Into P (Park) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Shifting the Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Signaling Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 158 Skidding ...................... Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 132Door AjarWarning Player Sliding Light . . 117 Sliding Door Child Security Lock . . . 66 Snowstorm. If You're Caught in a . . 167 Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . 130 Sound Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Spare Tire. Compact . . . . . 195. 202. 304 SparkPlugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 249 Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Stains.Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Starting YourEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Starting Your Vehicle if the Battery is Dead ....................... 177 Steering In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . . . . . . . . . . 156 Off-RoadRecovery Tips ....................... 154 Steering Wheel Audio Touch Controls ..................... 143 SteeringWheel,Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 StereoSoundSystems . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Storage Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . . . . . . . . . . . 107 FrontSeatConsole Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 RearStorageCompartment . . . . . 100 Storing YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Stuck. If You Are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 104 Sunroof ....................... 98 SunVisors ..................... Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Taillight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87. 227 " .................... Tape Technical Facts & Specifications Bulbs ....................... 252 Electrical Equipment. Add-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71.243 EngineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . 251 Fluid Capacities & Types . . . . . . 249 Fuses & CircuitBreakers . . . . . . 244 ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Service Parts Identification Label ..................... 243 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..................... 243 TemperatureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 13 Theft .......................... 61 22 1 Thermostat .................... Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1 Time.Settingthe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 230 Tires ......................... Buying New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 CertificationEire Label . . . . . . . 228 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202. 235 Flat.Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193. 230 Inspection & Rotation . . . . . . . . . 231 Loading ..................... 228 230 Pressure .................... QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Spare.Compact . . . . . . . . . . 195.202 Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Wheel Alignment & Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 WheelReplacement . . . . . . . . . . 234 WhentoReplaceWheels . . . . . . 234 Top Strap ...................... 44 79 TorqueLock .................... Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 TowingYour Pontiac . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 TractionControl . . . . . . . . . . . . 115. 153 TractionControlWarningLights . . . 115 TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Driving with a Trailer . . . . . . . . . 172 171 Hitches .................... Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Low Fuel .................... 1 11 LowTraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Parking onHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 116 Trailer Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . 116 Transaxle. Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Sliding DoorAjar . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 TractionControl . . . . i . . . . . . . . 115 TurnSignal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . 82 Washer.Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 High-Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 88 Weight Pulse WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . 90 Gross Axle Weight Rating Turn & Lane Change Indicator ... 82 (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .................... 228 WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Wheel Alignment & Tire Balance . . 234 Underhood Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11 Wheel Covers. Howto Remove . . . . 196 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 WheelNuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199. 200 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Windows Vehicle Identification Number Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 (VIN) ....................... 243 Standard .................... 81 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92.222. 269 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121.128 243 Windshield Wiper Blade VIN ......................... VisorVanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Voltmeter ..................... 112 WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 W a r n i n g Flashers. Hazard . . . . . . . 176 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 IfYou’re Caught in a Blizzard . . 167 Warning Lights If Your Vehicle is Stuck in . . . . . . 114 Anti-LockBrakeSystem DeepSnow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 113 Brake ...................... Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Liftgate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 303 .. Service Station Information Hood Release Battery See Page 209 The Delco Freedom@battery needs no water. See Page 225 Windshield Washer Fluid Y See Page 222 Cooling System Check and add coolantonly at the coolant recovery tank. The fluid should be at the FULL HOT mark when the engine is warm. See Page 220 Transaxle Fluid See Page 217 Engine Oil See Page 211 Cold Tire Pressure\ 111 I I See Certificationnire Label on inside edge of driver’s door. See Page 228 Fuel Capacity 20 U.S. Gal. (76 L) Use unleaded gas only, 87 Octane or higher. See Page 207 Spare Tire Pressure Compact Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa) See Page 202
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project